Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 370

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

V100R002

IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Issue 03
Date 2008-8-30
Part Number 00425665

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any
assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide Contents

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1


1 Safety Precautions......................................................................................................................1-1
2 Routine Maintenance Guide....................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Routine Maintenance Items.............................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.1 Web LCT–Based Routine Maintenance Items.......................................................................................2-2
2.1.2 T2000-Based Routine Maintenance Items.............................................................................................2-3
2.1.3 Field Maintenance Items for Indoor Equipment....................................................................................2-3
2.1.4 Field Maintenance Items for Outdoor Equipment..................................................................................2-4
2.2 Guide to Web LCT–Based Routine Maintenance...........................................................................................2-4
2.2.1 Checking the Status of NEs and Boards.................................................................................................2-4
2.2.2 Browsing the Current Alarms................................................................................................................2-5
2.2.3 Browsing the History Alarms.................................................................................................................2-6
2.2.4 Browsing the Abnormal Events.............................................................................................................2-7
2.2.5 Browsing the Current Performance Events of the SDH/PDH...............................................................2-8
2.2.6 Browsing the History Performance Events of the SDH/PDH................................................................2-9
2.2.7 Testing the IF 1+1 Switching...............................................................................................................2-10
2.2.8 Testing the IF N+1 Switching..............................................................................................................2-11
2.2.9 Testing the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Switching.................................................................2-12
2.3 Guide to T2000-Based Routine Maintenance...............................................................................................2-12
2.3.1 Checking the Status of NEs and Boards...............................................................................................2-13
2.3.2 Browsing the Current Alarms..............................................................................................................2-13
2.3.3 Browsing the History Alarms...............................................................................................................2-14
2.3.4 Browsing the Abnormal Events...........................................................................................................2-15
2.3.5 Browsing the Current Performance Events of the SDH/PDH..............................................................2-16
2.3.6 Browsing the History Performance Events of the SDH/PDH..............................................................2-17
2.3.7 Testing the IF 1+1 Switching...............................................................................................................2-18
2.3.8 Testing the IF N+1 Switching..............................................................................................................2-19
2.3.9 Testing the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Switching.................................................................2-20
2.4 Guide to Field IDU Maintenance..................................................................................................................2-21
2.4.1 Cleaning the Air Filter..........................................................................................................................2-21
2.4.2 Testing the Orderwire Phone................................................................................................................2-21
2.4.3 Checking the Equipment Room...........................................................................................................2-22

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
Contents IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

2.5 Guide to Field Maintenance of Outdoor Equipment.....................................................................................2-23


2.5.1 Checking the ODU...............................................................................................................................2-23
2.5.2 Checking the Hybrid Coupler..............................................................................................................2-24
2.5.3 Checking the Antenna..........................................................................................................................2-24
2.5.4 Checking IF Cables..............................................................................................................................2-25

3 Emergency Maintenance Guide..............................................................................................3-1


3.1 Definition of Emergency.................................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Purposes of Emergence Maintenance..............................................................................................................3-2
3.3 Procedure of Emergency Maintenance............................................................................................................3-2

4 Troubleshooting Guide.............................................................................................................4-1
4.1 General Fault Locating Procedures.................................................................................................................4-3
4.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruptions............................................................................................................4-5
4.3 Troubleshooting Microwave Links...............................................................................................................4-10
4.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors............................................................................................................................4-17
4.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications..........................................................................................................4-22
4.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with the SDH Equipment...................................................................4-26
4.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with the PDH Equipment...................................................................4-30
4.8 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service Faults......................................................................................................4-32
4.9 Troubleshooting the Orderwire.....................................................................................................................4-38

5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide..............................................................................5-1


5.1 Loopback.........................................................................................................................................................5-3
5.1.1 Setting Loopback for the SDH Optical Interface Board........................................................................5-3
5.1.2 Setting Loopback for the SDH Electrical Interface Board.....................................................................5-5
5.1.3 Setting Loopback of the PDH Interface Board......................................................................................5-7
5.1.4 Setting Loopback on the IF Board.........................................................................................................5-8
5.1.5 Setting Loopback of the Ethernet Service Processing Board...............................................................5-11
5.1.6 Setting Loopback of the ODU..............................................................................................................5-12
5.2 Resetting........................................................................................................................................................5-14
5.2.1 Cold Resetting......................................................................................................................................5-14
5.2.2 Warm Resetting....................................................................................................................................5-14
5.2.3 SCC Resetting......................................................................................................................................5-15
5.3 PRBS Test.....................................................................................................................................................5-15
5.4 Using the Ethernet Test Frames....................................................................................................................5-18
5.5 Setting the State of the ODU Transmitter.....................................................................................................5-19
5.6 Setting the State of the Laser.........................................................................................................................5-20
5.7 Setting the Automatic Release Function.......................................................................................................5-20
5.8 Part Replacement...........................................................................................................................................5-21
5.8.1 Removing a Board................................................................................................................................5-21
5.8.2 Inserting a Board..................................................................................................................................5-23
5.8.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board........................................................................................5-24
5.8.4 Replacing the SDH Electrical Interface Board.....................................................................................5-25

ii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide Contents

5.8.5 Replacing the PDH Interface Board.....................................................................................................5-26


5.8.6 Replacing the Ethernet Service Processing Board...............................................................................5-27
5.8.7 Replacing the IF Board........................................................................................................................5-28
5.8.8 Replacing the PXC Board....................................................................................................................5-29
5.8.9 Replacing the SCC Board....................................................................................................................5-30
5.8.10 Replacing the Fan Board....................................................................................................................5-31
5.8.11 Replacing the ODU............................................................................................................................5-33
5.9 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters......................................................................................................5-34
5.9.1 Cleaning Fiber Connectors Using Cartridge Cleaners.........................................................................5-34
5.9.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue....................................................................................5-36
5.9.3 Cleaning Fiber Adapters Using Optical Cleaning Sticks.....................................................................5-37

A Alarm Reference.......................................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Alarm List......................................................................................................................................................A-1
A.2 Alarms and Corrective Procedures..............................................................................................................A-10
A.2.1 A_LOC...............................................................................................................................................A-10
A.2.2 APS_MANUAL_STOP.....................................................................................................................A-11
A.2.3 ALM_GFP_dCSF...............................................................................................................................A-12
A.2.4 ALM_GFP_dLFD..............................................................................................................................A-13
A.2.5 ALM_RTC_FAIL...............................................................................................................................A-14
A.2.6 APS_FAIL..........................................................................................................................................A-15
A.2.7 APS_INDI..........................................................................................................................................A-16
A.2.8 AU_AIS..............................................................................................................................................A-17
A.2.9 AU_LOP.............................................................................................................................................A-19
A.2.10 B1_EXC...........................................................................................................................................A-20
A.2.11 B1_SD..............................................................................................................................................A-21
A.2.12 B2_EXC...........................................................................................................................................A-22
A.2.13 B2_SD..............................................................................................................................................A-23
A.2.14 B3_EXC...........................................................................................................................................A-24
A.2.15 B3_EXC_VC3..................................................................................................................................A-25
A.2.16 B3_SD..............................................................................................................................................A-26
A.2.17 B3_SD_VC3.....................................................................................................................................A-27
A.2.18 BD_NOT_INSTALLED..................................................................................................................A-28
A.2.19 BD_STATUS...................................................................................................................................A-29
A.2.20 BIP_EXC..........................................................................................................................................A-32
A.2.21 BIP_SD.............................................................................................................................................A-33
A.2.22 BOOTROM_BAD............................................................................................................................A-33
A.2.23 C2_VCAIS.......................................................................................................................................A-35
A.2.24 CONFIG_NOSUPPORT..................................................................................................................A-35
A.2.25 DBMS_ERROR...............................................................................................................................A-37
A.2.26 DBMS_PROTECT_MODE.............................................................................................................A-39
A.2.27 DN_E1_AIS.....................................................................................................................................A-40
A.2.28 E1_LOC............................................................................................................................................A-41

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
Contents IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

A.2.29 E1_LOS............................................................................................................................................A-42
A.2.30 ESN_FAILED..................................................................................................................................A-43
A.2.31 ESN_INVALID................................................................................................................................A-44
A.2.32 ETH_LOS.........................................................................................................................................A-45
A.2.33 EXT_SYNC_LOS............................................................................................................................A-46
A.2.34 F1PORT_FAILED...........................................................................................................................A-48
A.2.35 FAN_FAIL.......................................................................................................................................A-48
A.2.36 FCS_ERR.........................................................................................................................................A-49
A.2.37 HARD_BAD....................................................................................................................................A-51
A.2.38 HP_CROSSTR.................................................................................................................................A-53
A.2.39 HP_LOM..........................................................................................................................................A-54
A.2.40 HP_RDI............................................................................................................................................A-55
A.2.41 HP_REI.............................................................................................................................................A-56
A.2.42 HP_SLM...........................................................................................................................................A-57
A.2.43 HP_TIM............................................................................................................................................A-59
A.2.44 HP_UNEQ........................................................................................................................................A-60
A.2.45 HPAD_CROSSTR...........................................................................................................................A-61
A.2.46 HSB_INDI........................................................................................................................................A-62
A.2.47 HSM_INDI.......................................................................................................................................A-63
A.2.48 IF_CABLE_OPEN...........................................................................................................................A-64
A.2.49 IF_INPWR_ABN.............................................................................................................................A-65
A.2.50 IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED..........................................................................................................A-67
A.2.51 IN_PWR_HIGH...............................................................................................................................A-67
A.2.52 IN_PWR_LOW................................................................................................................................A-69
A.2.53 J0_MM.............................................................................................................................................A-70
A.2.54 K1_K2_M.........................................................................................................................................A-71
A.2.55 K2_M................................................................................................................................................A-72
A.2.56 LASER_CLOSED............................................................................................................................A-74
A.2.57 LASER_MOD_ERR_EX.................................................................................................................A-75
A.2.58 LCAS_FOPR....................................................................................................................................A-76
A.2.59 LCAS_FOPT....................................................................................................................................A-77
A.2.60 LCAS_PLCR....................................................................................................................................A-79
A.2.61 LCAS_PLCT....................................................................................................................................A-80
A.2.62 LCAS_TLCR....................................................................................................................................A-81
A.2.63 LCAS_TLCT....................................................................................................................................A-83
A.2.64 LCS_LIMITED................................................................................................................................A-84
A.2.65 LICENSE_LOST..............................................................................................................................A-85
A.2.66 LICENSE_ERR................................................................................................................................A-86
A.2.67 LINK_ERR.......................................................................................................................................A-87
A.2.68 LOOP_ALM.....................................................................................................................................A-88
A.2.69 LPS_UNI_BI_M...............................................................................................................................A-90
A.2.70 LP_CROSSTR..................................................................................................................................A-91

iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide Contents

A.2.71 LP_R_FIFO......................................................................................................................................A-92
A.2.72 LP_RDI.............................................................................................................................................A-93
A.2.73 LP_RDI_VC12.................................................................................................................................A-94
A.2.74 LP_RDI_VC3...................................................................................................................................A-95
A.2.75 LP_REI.............................................................................................................................................A-96
A.2.76 LP_REI_VC12.................................................................................................................................A-97
A.2.77 LP_REI_VC3...................................................................................................................................A-97
A.2.78 LP_RFI.............................................................................................................................................A-98
A.2.79 LP_SIZE_ERR.................................................................................................................................A-99
A.2.80 LP_SLM.........................................................................................................................................A-100
A.2.81 LP_SLM_VC12..............................................................................................................................A-101
A.2.82 LP_SLM_VC3................................................................................................................................A-102
A.2.83 LP_T_FIFO....................................................................................................................................A-103
A.2.84 LP_TIM..........................................................................................................................................A-104
A.2.85 LP_TIM_VC12...............................................................................................................................A-105
A.2.86 LP_TIM_VC3.................................................................................................................................A-106
A.2.87 LP_UNEQ......................................................................................................................................A-107
A.2.88 LP_UNEQ_VC12...........................................................................................................................A-108
A.2.89 LP_UNEQ_VC3.............................................................................................................................A-109
A.2.90 LSR_NO_FITED............................................................................................................................A-111
A.2.91 LSR_WILL_DIE............................................................................................................................A-111
A.2.92 LTI..................................................................................................................................................A-112
A.2.93 MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH...........................................................................................................A-114
A.2.94 MS_AIS..........................................................................................................................................A-115
A.2.95 MS_CROSSTR...............................................................................................................................A-116
A.2.96 MS_RDI.........................................................................................................................................A-117
A.2.97 MS_REI..........................................................................................................................................A-118
A.2.98 MSAD_CROSSTR.........................................................................................................................A-119
A.2.99 MSSW_DIFFERENT.....................................................................................................................A-120
A.2.100 MW_FECUNCOR.......................................................................................................................A-121
A.2.101 MW_LIM.....................................................................................................................................A-122
A.2.102 MW_LOF.....................................................................................................................................A-124
A.2.103 MW_RDI......................................................................................................................................A-125
A.2.104 NESF_LOST................................................................................................................................A-126
A.2.105 NESTATE_INSTALL..................................................................................................................A-127
A.2.106 NO_BD_SOFT.............................................................................................................................A-128
A.2.107 NP1_MANUAL_STOP................................................................................................................A-129
A.2.108 NP1_SW_FAIL............................................................................................................................A-130
A.2.109 NP1_SW_INDI.............................................................................................................................A-131
A.2.110 OPM_FAIL...................................................................................................................................A-132
A.2.111 PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE......................................................................................................A-133
A.2.112 POWER_ALM.............................................................................................................................A-134

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
Contents IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

A.2.113 POWER_FAIL.............................................................................................................................A-135
A.2.114 P_AIS...........................................................................................................................................A-136
A.2.115 P_LOS..........................................................................................................................................A-137
A.2.116 PS..................................................................................................................................................A-138
A.2.117 R_F_RST......................................................................................................................................A-139
A.2.118 R_LOC.........................................................................................................................................A-140
A.2.119 R_LOF..........................................................................................................................................A-142
A.2.120 R_LOS..........................................................................................................................................A-143
A.2.121 R_S_ERR.....................................................................................................................................A-145
A.2.122 RADIO_MUTE............................................................................................................................A-146
A.2.123 RADIO_RSL_HIGH....................................................................................................................A-148
A.2.124 RADIO_RSL_LOW.....................................................................................................................A-149
A.2.125 RADIO_TSL_HIGH....................................................................................................................A-151
A.2.126 RADIO_TSL_LOW.....................................................................................................................A-151
A.2.127 RELAY_ALARM........................................................................................................................A-152
A.2.128 RP_LOC.......................................................................................................................................A-153
A.2.129 RS_CROSSTR.............................................................................................................................A-154
A.2.130 S1_SYN_CHANGE.....................................................................................................................A-155
A.2.131 SYN_BAD....................................................................................................................................A-156
A.2.132 SYNC_C_LOS.............................................................................................................................A-157
A.2.133 T_ALOS.......................................................................................................................................A-158
A.2.134 T_F_RST......................................................................................................................................A-159
A.2.135 T_FIFO_E.....................................................................................................................................A-160
A.2.136 T_LOC..........................................................................................................................................A-161
A.2.137 T_LOS..........................................................................................................................................A-163
A.2.138 TEMP_ALARM...........................................................................................................................A-164
A.2.139 TU_AIS........................................................................................................................................A-165
A.2.140 TU_AIS_VC12.............................................................................................................................A-167
A.2.141 TU_AIS_VC3...............................................................................................................................A-168
A.2.142 TU_LOP.......................................................................................................................................A-170
A.2.143 TU_LOP_VC12............................................................................................................................A-171
A.2.144 TU_LOP_VC3..............................................................................................................................A-172
A.2.145 UP_E1_AIS..................................................................................................................................A-173
A.2.146 VCAT_LOA.................................................................................................................................A-175
A.2.147 VCAT_LOM_VC12.....................................................................................................................A-176
A.2.148 VCAT_LOM_VC3.......................................................................................................................A-177
A.2.149 VCAT_SQM_VC12.....................................................................................................................A-178
A.2.150 VCAT_SQM_VC3.......................................................................................................................A-179
A.2.151 VOLT_LOS..................................................................................................................................A-181
A.2.152 WRG_BD_TYPE.........................................................................................................................A-183
A.2.153 WRG_DEV_TYPE.......................................................................................................................A-184
A.2.154 WS_LOS.......................................................................................................................................A-184

vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide Contents

A.2.155 W_R_Failure................................................................................................................................A-186
A.2.156 XCP_INDI....................................................................................................................................A-186
A.2.157 XPIC_LOS...................................................................................................................................A-187

B Performance Event Reference.................................................................................................B-1


B.1 Performance Event List..................................................................................................................................B-1
B.1.1 SDH /PDH Performance Event List.....................................................................................................B-1
B.1.2 Microwave Performance Events...........................................................................................................B-4
B.1.3 Other Performance Events....................................................................................................................B-5
B.2 Performance Events and Corrective Procedures............................................................................................B-6
B.2.1 AUPJCHIGH, AUPJCLOW, and AUPJCNEW...................................................................................B-6
B.2.2 TUPJCHIGH, TUPJCLOW, and TUPJCNEW....................................................................................B-7
B.2.3 RSBBE, RSES, RSSES, RSCSES, and RSUAS..................................................................................B-8
B.2.4 RSOOF and RSOFS..............................................................................................................................B-9
B.2.5 MSBBE, MSES, MSSES, MSCSES, and MSUAS............................................................................B-10
B.2.6 MSFEBBE, MSFEES, MSFESES, MSFECSES, and MSFEUAS.....................................................B-11
B.2.7 HPBBE, HPES, HPSES, HPCSES, and HPUAS...............................................................................B-12
B.2.8 HPFEBBE, HPFEES, HPFESES, HPFECSES, and HPFEUAS........................................................B-14
B.2.9 VC3BBE, VC3ES, VC3SES, VC3CSES, and VC3UAS...................................................................B-15
B.2.10 VC3FEBBE, VC3FEES, VC3FESES, VC3FECSES, VC3FEUAS.................................................B-16
B.2.11 LPBBE, LPES, LPSES, LPCSES, and LPUAS................................................................................B-17
B.2.12 LPFEBBE, LPFEES, LPFESES, LPFECSES and LPFEUAS.........................................................B-18
B.2.13 E3_LCV_SDH, E3_LES_SDH, and E3_LSES_SDH......................................................................B-19
B.2.14 T3_LCV_SDH, T3_LES_SDH, and T3_LSES_SDH......................................................................B-20
B.2.15 TSLMAX, TSLMIN, and TSLCUR.................................................................................................B-21
B.2.16 RSLMAX, RSLMIN and RSLCUR.................................................................................................B-22
B.2.17 FEC_BEF_COR_ER, FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT...............................................................................B-22
B.2.18 TPLMAX, TPLMIN, and TPLCUR.................................................................................................B-23
B.2.19 RPLMAX, RPLMIN, and RPLCUR................................................................................................B-24
B.2.20 BDTMPMAX, BDTMPMIN, and BDTMPCUR.............................................................................B-24
B.2.21 OSPITMPMAX, OSPITMPMIN, and OSPITMPCUR....................................................................B-25

C Alarm Management.................................................................................................................C-1
C.1 NE Alarm Management.................................................................................................................................C-1
C.2 Board Alarm Management.............................................................................................................................C-1
C.2.1 Setting the Alarm Level........................................................................................................................C-1
C.2.2 Alarm Suppression................................................................................................................................C-1
C.2.3 Alarm Auto-Report...............................................................................................................................C-1
C.2.4 Alarm Reversion...................................................................................................................................C-2
C.2.5 Setting Bit Error Alarm Threshold.......................................................................................................C-2
C.2.6 AIS Insertion.........................................................................................................................................C-3
C.2.7 UNEQ Insertion....................................................................................................................................C-4

D Performance Event Management..........................................................................................D-1

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
Contents IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

D.1 NE Performance Event Management............................................................................................................D-1


D.2 Board Performance Event Management........................................................................................................D-1

E Alarm Suppression Relation...................................................................................................E-1


F Glossary.......................................................................................................................................F-1
G Acronyms and Abbreviations...............................................................................................G-1
Index.................................................................................................................................................i-1

viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide Figures

Figures

Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap............................................................................................................... 1-3


Figure 3-1 Main procedure of emergency maintenance.......................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-2 Procedure of on-site fault handling.....................................................................................................3-6
Figure 4-1 General fault locating procedures.......................................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-2 Flow of handling service interruptions...............................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-3 Procedure of on-site fault handling.....................................................................................................4-8
Figure 4-4 Flow of handling microwave link faults...........................................................................................4-13
Figure 4-5 Flow of handling bit errors...............................................................................................................4-20
Figure 4-6 Flow of handling pointer justifications.............................................................................................4-24
Figure 4-7 Flow of troubleshooting the interconnection with the SDH equipment...........................................4-28
Figure 4-8 Flow of troubleshooting the interconnection with the PDH equipment...........................................4-31
Figure 4-9 Flow of handling Ethernet service faults..........................................................................................4-34
Figure 4-10 Flow of handling RMON abnormal performance events...............................................................4-37
Figure 4-11 Flow of handling orderwire faults..................................................................................................4-39
Figure 5-1 Optical interface inloop......................................................................................................................5-3
Figure 5-2 Optical interface outloop....................................................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-3 VC-4 path outloop..............................................................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-4 VC-4 path inloop................................................................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-5 Electrical interface inloop ..................................................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-6 Electrical interface outloop.................................................................................................................5-6
Figure 5-7 VC-4 path outloop .............................................................................................................................5-6
Figure 5-8 Tributary inloop..................................................................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-9 Tributary outloop................................................................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-10 IF port inloop....................................................................................................................................5-8
Figure 5-11 IF port outloop..................................................................................................................................5-9
Figure 5-12 Port inloop........................................................................................................................................ 5-9
Figure 5-13 Port outloop...................................................................................................................................... 5-9
Figure 5-14 VC-4 path inloop............................................................................................................................5-10
Figure 5-15 Inloop over an Ethernet port...........................................................................................................5-11
Figure 5-16 VC-3 path inloop ...........................................................................................................................5-11
Figure 5-17 VC-3 path outloop .........................................................................................................................5-11
Figure 5-18 RF inloopback.................................................................................................................................5-13
Figure 5-19 PRBS test in the tributary direction................................................................................................5-16

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
Figures IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Figure 5-20 PRBS test in the cross-connect direction........................................................................................5-16


Figure 5-21 Ethernet test frames between Ethernet boards................................................................................5-18
Figure 5-22 Removing a board (1).....................................................................................................................5-22
Figure 5-23 Removing a board (2) ....................................................................................................................5-22
Figure 5-24 Removing a board (3).....................................................................................................................5-22
Figure 5-25 Inserting a board (1).......................................................................................................................5-23
Figure 5-26 Inserting a board (2).......................................................................................................................5-24
Figure 5-27 Inserting a board (3).......................................................................................................................5-24
Figure 5-28 Remove the portable memory card.................................................................................................5-31
Figure 5-29 Pulling out the fan tray assembly...................................................................................................5-32
Figure 5-30 Removing the fan board.................................................................................................................5-32
Figure 5-31 CLETOP cassette cleaner...............................................................................................................5-35
Figure 5-32 Dragging the fiber tip slightly on one cleaning area.......................................................................5-35
Figure 5-33 Dragging the fiber tip slightly on the other cleaning area..............................................................5-36
Figure 5-34 Cleaning the fiber with the lens tissue ...........................................................................................5-37

x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide Tables

Tables

Table 2-1 Web LCT–based routine maintenance items....................................................................................... 2-2


Table 2-2 T2000-based routine maintenance items..............................................................................................2-3
Table 2-3 Field maintenance items for indoor equipment....................................................................................2-4
Table 2-4 Field maintenance items for outdoor equipment..................................................................................2-4
Table 3-1 Description of the main procedure of emergency maintenance...........................................................3-4
Table 3-2 Sheet for on-site operations..................................................................................................................3-4
Table 3-3 Procedure of on-site fault handling......................................................................................................3-7
Table 4-1 Flow description...................................................................................................................................4-5
Table 4-2 Flow description...................................................................................................................................4-7
Table 4-3 Procedure of on-site fault handling......................................................................................................4-9
Table 4-4 Causes of microwave link faults........................................................................................................4-11
Table 4-5 Flow description.................................................................................................................................4-14
Table 4-6 Causes of bit errors.............................................................................................................................4-18
Table 4-7 Flow description.................................................................................................................................4-20
Table 4-8 Flow description.................................................................................................................................4-25
Table 4-9 Flow description.................................................................................................................................4-29
Table 4-10 Flow description...............................................................................................................................4-32
Table 4-11 Flow description...............................................................................................................................4-35
Table 4-12 Flow description...............................................................................................................................4-37
Table 4-13 Flow description...............................................................................................................................4-40
Table 5-1 Part replacement description .............................................................................................................5-21
Table A-1 Alarm list............................................................................................................................................A-1
Table B-1 Pointer justification performance event list........................................................................................B-1
Table B-2 Regenerator section error performance event list...............................................................................B-1
Table B-3 Multiplex section error performance event list...................................................................................B-2
Table B-4 Higher order path error performance event list...................................................................................B-2
Table B-5 VC-3 path bit error performance event list.........................................................................................B-3
Table B-6 Lower order path error performance event list...................................................................................B-3
Table B-7 Line side code violation performance event list.................................................................................B-4
Table B-8 Microwave power performance events...............................................................................................B-4
Table B-9 FEC performance events.....................................................................................................................B-5
Table B-10 Optical power performance events...................................................................................................B-5
Table B-11 Board temperature performance events............................................................................................B-5

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
Tables IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Table B-12 Laser core temperature performance events.....................................................................................B-5


Table C-1 Setting of the bit error alarm threshold...............................................................................................C-3
Table C-2 Setting of AIS insertion......................................................................................................................C-3
Table C-3 Setting of UNEQ insertion.................................................................................................................C-4
Table D-1 Board performance event management function................................................................................D-1
Table E-1 Suppression relation between intra-board alarms...............................................................................E-1
Table E-2 Suppression relation between inter-board alarms...............................................................................E-2

xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document is a maintenance guide of the OptiX RTN 600–based IDU 610/620. It also
contains details of alarms and performance events for reference purpose.

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX RTN 600 V100R002

OptiX iManager T2000 V200R006C03

Intended Audience
This document is intended for the maintenance engineers of the OptiX RTN 600. Before reading
this document, you need to:
l Know microwave communication basics.
l Know the basics of the OptiX RTN 600 product.

Organization
This document is organized as follows.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
About This Document IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Chapter Content

1 Safety Describes parts of the safety precautions. Read and follow these safety
Precautions precautions before installing, commissioning, and maintaining the
OptiX RTN 600.

2 Routine Describes maintenance items and operation procedures for routine


Maintenance Guide maintenance of the OptiX RTN 600.

3 Emergency Describes operation procedures for emergency maintenance of the


Maintenance Guide OptiX RTN 600.

4 Troubleshooting Describes the causes of common faults and troubleshooting


Guide procedures of the OptiX RTN 600.

5 Common Describes common maintenance operations of the OptiX RTN 600.


Maintenance
Operation Guide

A Alarm Reference Describes all the possible alarms and clearing procedures of the OptiX
RTN 600.

B Performance Describes all the performance events and clearing procedures of the
Event Reference OptiX RTN 600.

C Alarm Describes the alarm management function of the OptiX RTN 600.
Management

D Performance Describes the performance management function of the OptiX RTN


Event Management 600.

E Alarm Describes the alarm suppression relation of the OptiX RTN 600.
Suppression
Relation

F Glossary Lists the terms used in this document.

G Acronyms and Lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this document.
Abbreviations

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not


avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide About This Document

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which


if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not


avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time.

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement


important points of the main text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in


boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.


Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, windows, and dialog titles are in
boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For
example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Mouse Operation
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
About This Document IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without
moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain
position.

Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version
contains all updates made to previous versions.

Updates in Issue 03 (2008-08-30)


Third release.
Known defects are modified as required.

Updates in Issue 02 (2008-06-20)


Second release.
Known defects are modified as required.

Updates in Issue 01 (2008-05-20)


Initial release.

4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions

1 Safety Precautions

CAUTION
Before performing any operation, go through the instructions and precautions carefully to
minimize the possibility of accidents. The Caution, Warning and Danger items in other
documents do not cover all the safety precautions that must be followed. They are only
supplements to the safety precautions for operations as a whole. The personnel in charge of the
installation and maintenance must be trained to learn the proper operating methods and all safety
precautions. Only the trained and qualified personnel can install or maintain the device.

When operating the device, abide by the local safety regulations. The precautions listed in this
chapter are in compliance with the local safety regulations.

When operating the Huawei device, follow the full precautions and special safety instructions
from Huawei.

The personnel in charge of installation and maintenance must understand the basics of the safety
operations. Only trained and qualified personnel can install or maintain the device.

High Voltage

DANGER
l The high voltage power supply supplies power for the device operation. Direct or indirect
contact (through damp objects) with high voltage and AC mains supply may result in fatal
accident.
l Non-standard and improper high voltage operations can result in fire and electric shock.
Therefore, you must abide by the local rules and regulations when bridging and wiring AC
cables through a certain area. The personnel who perform high voltage operations must be
qualified for performing high voltage and AC operations.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
1 Safety Precautions IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

l Do not wear conducting articles, such as watches, chains, bracelets and rings while
performing high voltage operations.
l Switch off the power supply immediately if you find water in the rack or if the rack is damp.
l Make sure that the device is kept away from water when being operated in a damp
environment.

Power Cable

DANGER
l Do not install or remove a live line. Transient contact between the core of the power cable
and the conductor might generate electric arc or spark, which can cause fire or damage to the
human body.
l During high voltage and AC operations, special tools must be used instead of common tools.

l Before installing or removing the power cable, turn off the power switch.
l Before connecting the power cable, make sure that the power cable and label conform to
the requirements of the actual installation.

Thunderstorm

DANGER
High voltage and AC operations, or operations on a steel tower and a mast on a thunderstorm
day are prohibited.

On a thunderstorm day, the electromagnetic field generated in the thunderstorm area may cause
damage to electronic parts. To prevent the device from being damaged by lightning, use proper
grounding.

Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTION
The static electricity generated by the human body can damage the electrostatic sensitive
components on the circuit board, such as the large-scale integrated circuit (LIC).

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) is caused by body movement, friction between shoes and floor,
friction between clothes, and contact with plastic objects. ESD remains in the human body for
a long time.
Before touching the device or holding the boards, circuit boards, or ASICs, wear a grounded
ESD wrist strap. It can prevent the sensitive components from being damaged by the static
electricity in the human body.

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

Microwave

WARNING
Strong radio frequency can harm the human body.

Do not stay too close to the antenna in the emitting direction of the antenna when the microwave
communication equipment is working. Before installing or maintaining an antenna in a steel
tower or a mast with a large number of transmitter antennas, the operator should coordinate all
parties concerned to shut down the transmitter antennas.

Laser

WARNING
Laser radiation can cause injury to your eyes.

When handling optical fibers, do not stand close to or look into the optical fiber outlet directly
with naked eyes.

High Temperature

WARNING

When the ambient temperature is higher than 55℃, the surface temperature of the IDU boards
may exceed 70℃. In this case, wear protective gloves before touching the IDU boards.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
1 Safety Precautions IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Working at Heights

WARNING
When working at heights, prevent objects from falling down.

Working at high altitude shall comply with the following requirements:

l Only trained personnel can work at high altitudes.


l The operating machines and tools should be carried and handled safely to prevent them
from falling.
l Safety measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, should be taken.
l In cold areas, warm clothes must be worn before performing any high-altitude operation.
l  Appliances used for lifting objects must be checked and ensured to be intact before
performing any high-altitude operation.

Hoisting Heavy Objects

DANGER
During hoisting heavy objects, do not stand or walk under the boom or the objects.

Sharp Objects

WARNING
When carrying the device with hands, wear protection gloves to avoid injuries caused by sharp
objects.

IF Cable

WARNING
Before installing or removing the IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR power switch on the IF board.

1-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions

Installing and Removing Boards

CAUTION
l When inserting a board, handle it gently to avoid distorting the pins on the backplane.
l Insert the board along the slot guide. Do not allow the board interfaces to come in contact
with that of another board as this can cause short-circuit or can damage the board.
l When holding a board in hand, do not touch the board circuit, components, connectors, or
the connection slots.

Bundling Signal Cables

CAUTION
Bundle the signal cables separately from the strong current cables or high voltage cables. The
space between two adjacent ties must be at least 150 mm.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 2 Routine Maintenance Guide

2 Routine Maintenance Guide

About This Chapter

The aim of routine maintenance is to detect and rectify hidden faults in time before the equipment
becomes faulty and services are affected.

2.1 Routine Maintenance Items


Routine maintenance items are classified into four categories: routine maintenance items carried
out through the Web LCT, routine maintenance items carried out through the T2000, field
maintenance items for indoor equipment, and field maintenance items for outdoor equipment.
2.2 Guide to Web LCT–Based Routine Maintenance
This topic describes the guide to the routine maintenance operations that are carried out through
the Web LCT.
2.3 Guide to T2000-Based Routine Maintenance
This topic provides the methods for guiding the T2000-based routine maintenance.
2.4 Guide to Field IDU Maintenance
This guide describes how to carry out routine maintenance for the IDU and the equipment room
where the IDU is installed.
2.5 Guide to Field Maintenance of Outdoor Equipment
This guide describes how to carry out routine maintenance on site for the outdoor equipment.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
2 Routine Maintenance Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

2.1 Routine Maintenance Items


Routine maintenance items are classified into four categories: routine maintenance items carried
out through the Web LCT, routine maintenance items carried out through the T2000, field
maintenance items for indoor equipment, and field maintenance items for outdoor equipment.

2.1.1 Web LCT–Based Routine Maintenance Items


This topic describes the routine maintenance items that can be carried out through the Web LCT.

Table 2-1 Web LCT–based routine maintenance items


Maintenance Item Recommen Remarks
ded Cycle

2.2.1 Checking the Status of NEs and Every day -


Boards

2.2.2 Browsing the Current Alarms Every day -

2.2.3 Browsing the History Alarms Every day -

2.2.4 Browsing the Abnormal Events Every day -

2.2.5 Browsing the Current Performance Every day -


Events of the SDH/PDH

2.2.6 Browsing the History Performance Every day -


Events of the SDH/PDH

2.2.7 Testing the IF 1+1 Switching Half a year Applies only to the
equipment that is configured
in 1+1 protection mode.
During the 1+1 protection
switching (< 500 ms),
protection services are
interrupted. Hence, you are
recommended to carry out 1
+1 protection switching
when the traffic is light.

2.2.8 Testing the IF N+1 Switching Half a year Applies only to the
equipment that is configured
in N+1 protection mode.

2.2.9 Testing the Two-Fiber Bidirectional Half a year Applies only to the
MSP Ring Switching equipment that is configured
in two-fiber bidirectional
MSP.

2-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 2 Routine Maintenance Guide

2.1.2 T2000-Based Routine Maintenance Items


This topic describes the guide to the routine maintenance items that are carried out through the
T2000.

Table 2-2 T2000-based routine maintenance items


Maintenance Item Recommen Remarks
ded Cycle

2.3.1 Checking the Status of NEs and Every day -


Boards

2.3.2 Browsing the Current Alarms Every day -

2.3.3 Browsing the History Alarms Every day -

2.3.4 Browsing the Abnormal Events Every day -

2.3.5 Browsing the Current Performance Every day -


Events of the SDH/PDH

2.3.6 Browsing the History Performance Every day -


Events of the SDH/PDH

2.3.7 Testing the IF 1+1 Switching Half a year Applies only to the
equipment that is configured
in 1+1 protection mode.
During the 1+1 protection
switching (< 500 ms),
protection services are
interrupted. Hence, you are
recommended to carry out 1
+1 protection switching
when the traffic is light.

2.3.8 Testing the IF N+1 Switching Half a year Applies only to the
equipment that is configured
in N+1 protection mode.

2.3.9 Testing the Two-Fiber Bidirectional Half a year Applies only to the
MSP Ring Switching equipment that is configured
in two-fiber bidirectional
MSP.

2.1.3 Field Maintenance Items for Indoor Equipment


This topic describes the field maintenance items in the equipment room where the IDU is
installed.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
2 Routine Maintenance Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Table 2-3 Field maintenance items for indoor equipment

Maintenance Item Recommended Remarks


Cycle

2.4.1 Cleaning the Two months Only for the IDU 620a
Air Filter

2.4.2 Testing the Two months Only if that the equipment is equipped with
Orderwire Phone the orderwire phone

2.4.3 Checking the Two months Only if that the equipment is installed indoors
Equipment Room

NOTE
a: If the IDU 620 is installed in an outdoor dust-proof cabinet, the IDU is not installed with an air filter.

2.1.4 Field Maintenance Items for Outdoor Equipment


This topic describes the field maintenance items at places where the ODU, hybrid coupler,
antenna, and other outdoor equipment are installed.

Table 2-4 Field maintenance items for outdoor equipment

Maintenance Item Recommended Remarks


Cycle

2.5.1 Checking the Half a year Carry out a complete check after a level-8 or
ODU higher hurricane, an earthquake, or other
exceptional circumstances.
2.5.2 Checking the Half a year
Hybrid Coupler

2.5.3 Checking the Half a year


Antenna

2.5.4 Checking IF Half a year


Cables

2.2 Guide to Web LCT–Based Routine Maintenance


This topic describes the guide to the routine maintenance operations that are carried out through
the Web LCT.

2.2.1 Checking the Status of NEs and Boards


This topic describes how to check the status of an NE or a board through the Web LCT. By
obtaining the status of the NE or board, you can detect faults in time.

2-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 2 Routine Maintenance Guide

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of monitor level or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the Web LCT, open the NE List window, and check the Communication Status
column of a specific NE.
The Communication Status column should be Normal.

Step 2 If the Login Status column of a specific NE is Not Logged In, log in to the NE.
1. Right-click the NE, and choose NE Login from the shortcut menu.
The system displays the NE Login dialog box.
2. Specify User Name and Password.
l The user name is lct by default.
l The password for user lct is password by default.
NOTE

User lct has the authority of system level.


3. Click OK.
The Login Status column switches to Logged In.

Step 3 Click NE Explorer.

Step 4 Check NE STATE above the slot layout.


NE STATE should be Running.

Step 5 Check the running status of the boards by referring to the legend description.
If a board is running normally, it should be green.

----End

2.2.2 Browsing the Current Alarms


Periodically browsing alarms helps you to detect and rectify a fault in time.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of monitor level or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


Web LCT

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
2 Routine Maintenance Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Procedure

Step 1 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and click the icon in the toolbar.
NOTE

You can also click an alarm indicator on the toolbar to display the alarms of the specific severity.

From left to right, the alarm indicators and related alarm severities are as follows:
l Red: critical alarm
l Orange: major alarm
l Yellow: minor alarm
l Purple: warning
l Light blue: abnormal event

Step 2 Browse the displayed alarms.

Step 3 If there are newly generated alarms after the last maintenance, select the newly generated alarms,
record the details of the alarms, and notify the troubleshooting personnel for clearing the alarms
in time.
For details about how to handle alarms, refer to "A Alarm Reference".

----End

Related Information
A current alarm is an alarm that is not cleared.

2.2.3 Browsing the History Alarms


Periodically browsing alarms helps you to find and rectify a fault in time.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of monitor level or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure

Step 1 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and click the icon in the toolbar.

Step 2 Click the Browse History Alarm tab.

Step 3 Click Filter.


The Filter dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Specify Start Time and End Time, and then click Filter.

2-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 2 Routine Maintenance Guide

The start time should be the time when the last history alarm browsing operation was performed,
and the end time should be the current time.

Step 5 Browse the history alarms that are displayed.

Step 6 Click Save As.

The system displays the text file that lists the history alarms.

NOTE

You can also save the text file as required.

----End

Related Information
A history alarm is an alarm that has been cleared. An NE stores a maximum of 1,000 history
alarms.

2.2.4 Browsing the Abnormal Events


Periodically browsing abnormal events helps you to find abnormalities in the equipment in time.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of monitor level or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE from the NE Explorer, and choose Alarm > Browse Abnormal Events from the
Function Tree.
TIP

Alternatively, you can select an NE and then click the icon to switch to the Browse Abnormal
Events tab page.

Step 2 Click Filter.


The Filter dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Click Select All, and then click OK.

Step 4 Browse the displayed abnormal events.

Step 5 Optional: Click Save As.


The system displays the text file that lists the abnormal events.
NOTE

You can also save the text file as required.

----End

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
2 Routine Maintenance Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Related Information
An abnormal event is an abnormality that arises in the system at a particular time and not an
abnormality that persists for a long time. Being different from alarms, an abnormal event has
only occurrence time, with clearance time not provided.

2.2.5 Browsing the Current Performance Events of the SDH/PDH


Periodically browsing the performance events helps you to check the long-term running status
of the equipment. Hence, the latent hazards can be detected and cleared in time.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.
l The performance monitoring function must be enabled.
l The NE user has the authority of monitor level or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Select a specific board from the NE Explorer, and choose Performance > Current
Performance from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select All in Monitored Object Filter Condition.

Step 3 Select 15-Minute after Monitor Period.

Step 4 Select all the available performance events in Count, and select Display Continuous Severely
Errored Second in Display Options.

Step 5 Click Query.

Step 6 Browse the performance events that are displayed.


In normal situations, no bit error performance events should be displayed, and the number of
pointer justification events should be less than six per day.

Step 7 Select all the available performance events in Gauge, and select Current Value and Maximum/
Minimum Value in Display Options.

Step 8 Click Query.

Step 9 Browse the performance events that are displayed.


Compared with the history records, the gauge indicators, such as board temperature, do not
change drastically.

Step 10 Select 24-Hour after Monitor Period.

Step 11 Repeat Step 4 to Step 9 to query the current performance events in a period of 24 hours.

----End

2-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 2 Routine Maintenance Guide

Related Information
The counter of current performance events measures all the performance events that arise
between the start time of the monitoring period and the current time.

2.2.6 Browsing the History Performance Events of the SDH/PDH


Periodically browsing the performance events helps you to check the long-term running status
of the equipment. Hence, the latent hazards can be detected and cleared in time.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.
l The performance monitoring function must be enabled.
l The NE user has the authority of monitor level or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Select a specific board from the NE Explorer, and choose Performance > History
Performance from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select All in Monitored Object Filter Condition.
Step 3 Select 15-Minute after Monitor Period.
Step 4 Specify the start time and end time of a specific time span. The time span starts from the time
when the last history performance event browsing operation was performed to the current time.
Step 5 Select all the available performance events in Count, and select Display Continuous Severely
Errored Second in Display Options.
Step 6 Click Query to browse the history performance events.
Step 7 Click Save As.
The system displays the text file that lists the history performance events. You can save the text
file as required.
Step 8 Select all the available performance events in Gauge, and select Current Value and Maximum/
Minimum Value in Display Options.
Step 9 Click Query to browse the history performance events.
Step 10 Click Save As to save the performance events.
The system displays the text file that lists the history performance events.
NOTE

You can also save the text file as required.

Step 11 Select 24-Hour after Monitor Period.


Step 12 Repeat Step 4 to Step 10 to query the history performance events in a period of 24 hours.

----End

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
2 Routine Maintenance Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Related Information
A history performance event is a performance event where the monitor period ends in the past.
In the case of history performance events, an NE has only six 24-hour registers and sixteen 15-
minute registers for each performance indicator. Therefore, only the six most recent non-zero
24-hour performance events and the sixteen most-recent non-zero 15-minute performance events
can be obtained from the NE.

2.2.7 Testing the IF 1+1 Switching


Periodically testing the IF 1+1 switching helps you to check whether the equipment can switch
over normally.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of maintenance level or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


Web LCT

Precautions
l The IF 1+1 switching performed manually is a HSB switching. During the 1+1 protection
switching (< 500ms), protection services are interrupted. Hence, you are recommended to
carry out 1+1 protection switching when the traffic is light.
l Before you perform the switching, ensure that the standby equipment is working properly.
If the switching fails, contact Huawei engineers for further assistance.

Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE from the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from
the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select the IF 1+1 Protection tab.

Step 3 In Protection Group, select the protection group that is to be switched over.

Step 4 In Slot Mapping Relation, right-click the IF board, and choose Manual Switch to
Protection from the shortcut menu.

Step 5 Click OK to begin the protection switching.

Step 6 Click Query to check the protection switching status.


After the switching is complete, the Switching Status of Device of the working board should
be Manual Switching.

Step 7 After the equipment runs properly for a period, query the current alarms and performance events.
There should be no new alarms or performance events.

Step 8 Repeat Step 1 to Step 3.

Step 9 In Slot Mapping Relation, right-click the IF board, and choose Clear from the shortcut menu.

2-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 2 Routine Maintenance Guide

Step 10 Click OK to restore the protection switching.


Step 11 Click Query to check the protection switching status.
The Switching Status of Device of the working board should be Normal.
Step 12 After the equipment runs properly for some time, query the current alarms and performance
events.
There should be no new alarms or performance events.

----End

2.2.8 Testing the IF N+1 Switching


Periodically testing the IF N+1 switching helps you to check whether the equipment can be
normally switched over.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of maintenance level or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


Web LCT

Precautions
l This task helps to check whether an NE implements the N+1 protocol properly and is
designed only for test. Therefore, the service is not switched over.
l Before you perform the switching, ensure that the standby equipment is working properly.
If the switching fails, contact Huawei engineers for further assistance.

Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE from the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select N+1 Protection tab.
Step 3 In Slot Mapping Relation, right-click a working unit, and choose Exercise switching from the
shortcut menu.
The system displays a prompt message indicating that the switching command is issued
successfully.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Click Query to check the protection switching status.
The status of the working unit should be Exercise switching.
Step 6 Repeat Step 1 to Step 2.
Step 7 In Slot Mapping Relation, right-click the protection unit or a working unit, and choose Clear
from the shortcut menu.
Step 8 Click OK.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
2 Routine Maintenance Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Step 9 Click Query to check the protection switching status.


The status of the working unit should be normal.

----End

2.2.9 Testing the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Switching


Periodically testing the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring switching helps you to check whether
the equipment can be switched normally.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of maintenance level or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


Web LCT

Precautions
l This task helps to check whether an NE implements the MSP protocol properly and is
designed only for test. Therefore, the service is not switched over.
l Before you perform the switching, ensure that the standby equipment is working properly.
If the switching fails, contact Huawei engineers for further assistance.

Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Ring
MSP from the Function Tree.
Step 2 In Protection Group, select the protection group that is to be switched over.
Step 3 In Slot Mapping Relation, right-click East Line, and choose Exercise switching from the
shortcut menu.
Step 4 Click OK to query the status of protection switching. The Switching Status of the east line
board should be Excise ring switching.
Step 5 Right-click the selected line, and choose Clear excise ring switching from the shortcut menu.
Step 6 Click OK to query the status of protection switching. The Switching Status of the east line
board should be Normal.
Step 7 In Slot Mapping Relation, right-click West Line of the protection group selected in Step 2,
and choose Excise ring switching from the shortcut menu.
Step 8 Repeat Step 4 to Step 6.

----End

2.3 Guide to T2000-Based Routine Maintenance


This topic provides the methods for guiding the T2000-based routine maintenance.

2-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 2 Routine Maintenance Guide

2.3.1 Checking the Status of NEs and Boards


This topic describes how to check the status of an NE or a board through the T2000. By obtaining
the status of the NE or board, you can detect faults in time.

Prerequisite
l The T2000 is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of monitor level or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


T2000

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the T2000 system, and check the color of the NE icon.
TIP

In the toolbar of the main view, click the icon, and select the Legend tab in the displayed window.
By moving the vertical scrolling bar, you can view all the status legends of the NE.
The NE icon should be green. In other cases, you can infer as follows:
l If the NE icon is gray, you can infer that the NE loses communication with the T2000.
l If the NE icon is light blue, you can infer that the NE status is unknown.
l If the NE icon is red, you can infer that a critical alarm is generated.
l If the NE icon is orange, you can infer that a major alarm is generated.
l If the NE icon is yellow, you can infer that a minor alarm is generated.
l If the NE icon is purple, you can infer that a warning is generated.
l If the NE icon is deep blue, you can infer that an alarm is generated but not reported.

Step 2 Double-click the NE.


The slot layout is displayed.

Step 3 Check NE STATE above the slot layout.


NE STATE should be Running.

Step 4 Click the icon.


The system displays the legend description.

Step 5 Check the running status of the boards by referring to the legend description.
If a board is running normally, it should be green.

----End

2.3.2 Browsing the Current Alarms


Periodically browsing the current alarms helps you to find and rectify a fault in time.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
2 Routine Maintenance Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Prerequisite
l The T2000 is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of monitor level or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


T2000

Procedure
Step 1 On the T2000, choose Fault > Browse Current Alarms from the main menu.

Step 2 Select one or multiple NEs from the left pane, and click .
All the alarms of the selected NE or NEs are displayed in Browse Current Alarms.
Step 3 Select Auto Refresh.

Step 4 Browse the displayed alarms.

Step 5 Select the newly generated alarms, record the details of the alarms, and click OK.

Step 6 Notify the fault handling personnel of the alarms in a timely manner.
For details about how to handle alarms, refer to “A Alarm Reference”.

----End

Related Information
A current alarm is an alarm that is not cleared.
You can browse the network-wide alarms based on alarm severity by clicking the alarm
indicators in the upper right corner.

l You can click (red) to browse the network-wide critical alarms.

l You can click (orange) to browse the network-wide major alarms.

l You can click (yellow) to browse the network-wide minor alarms.


NOTE

l The number to the right side of each indicator indicates the number of network-wide alarms of the specific
severity.
l If a square frame is displayed around an alarm indicator, you can infer that there are unacknowledged alarms.

2.3.3 Browsing the History Alarms


Periodically browsing the history alarms helps you to find and rectify a fault in time.

Prerequisite
The NE user has the authority of monitor level or higher.

2-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 2 Routine Maintenance Guide

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


T2000

Procedure
Step 1 On the T2000, choose Fault > History Alarm Browse from the main menu.

Step 2 Select one or multiple NEs from the left pane, and click .
All the history alarms of the selected NE or NEs are displayed in History Alarm Browse.
Step 3 Click Filter.
The Filter dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 After specifying Start Time and End Time, click Filter.
The start time should be the time when the last history alarm browsing operation was performed,
and the end time should be the current time.
Step 5 Browse the alarms that are displayed.
Step 6 Click Save as to the history alarms as required.

----End

Related Information
A history alarm is an alarm that has been cleared.

2.3.4 Browsing the Abnormal Events


Periodically browsing abnormal events helps you to find abnormalities in the equipment in time.

Prerequisite
l The T2000 is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of monitor level or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


T2000

Procedure
Step 1 On the T2000, choose Fault > Browse Abnormal Events from the main menu.

Step 2 Select one or multiple NEs from the left pane, and click .
All the abnormal events of the selected NE or NEs are displayed in Browse Abnormal
Events.
Step 3 Browse the abnormal events.
Step 4 Optional: Click Save as to save the abnormal events as required.

----End

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
2 Routine Maintenance Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Related Information
An abnormal event is an abnormality that arises in the system at a particular time rather than
persists for a period. Being different from alarms, an abnormal event has only occurrence time,
with clearance time not provided.

2.3.5 Browsing the Current Performance Events of the SDH/PDH


Browsing the current performance events helps you to check the long-term running status of the
equipment. Hence, the latent hazards can be cleared in time.

Prerequisite
l The T2000 is in normal communication with the NE.
l The performance monitoring function must be enabled.
l The NE user has the authority of monitor level or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


T2000

Procedure
Step 1 On the T2000, choose Performance > Browse SDH Performance from the main menu, and
than select Current Performance Data.

Step 2 Select one or multiple NEs from the left pane, and click .

Step 3 Select All in Monitored Object Filter Condition.

Step 4 Select 15-Minute in the Monitor Period field.

Step 5 Select Count, select Select All in the tab page that is displayed, and select Consecutive Severely
Errored Seconds in the right pane.

Step 6 Click Query to browse the current performance events.


In normal situations, no bit error performance events should be displayed, and the number of
pointer justification events should be less than six per day.

Step 7 Select Gauge , select Select All in the tab page that is displayed, and select Current Value and
Maximum/Minimum Value in the right pane.

Step 8 Click Query to browse the current performance events.


Compared with the history records, the gauge indicators, such as board temperature, do not
change drastically.

Step 9 Re-define the time span by setting Monitor Period to 24-Hour, and leave other fields
unchanged.

Step 10 Repeat Step 5 to Step 8 to query the performance events in a period of 24 hours.

----End

2-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 2 Routine Maintenance Guide

Related Information
The counter of current performance events measures all the performance events that arise
between the start time of the monitoring period and the current time.

2.3.6 Browsing the History Performance Events of the SDH/PDH


Browsing the history performance events helps you to check the long-term running status of the
equipment. Hence, the latent hazards can be cleared in time.

Prerequisite
l The performance monitoring function must be enabled.
l The NE user has the authority of monitor level or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


T2000

Procedure
Step 1 On the T2000, choose Performance > Browse SDH Performance from the main menu, and
than select the History Performance Data tab.

Step 2 Select one or multiple NEs from the left pane, and click .

Step 3 Select All in Monitored Object Filter Condition.

Step 4 Select 15-Minute after Monitor Period.

Step 5 Specify the start time and end time of a specific time span.
The time span starts from the time when the last history performance event browsing operation
was performed to the current time.

Step 6 Specify Data Source.


NOTE

If this is the first browsing operation, you should select Query from NE and Save to Database. Otherwise,
you should select Query from T2000. In this case, the history performance databases of the T2000 and
NE are synchronized.

Step 7 Select the Count tab page, and then select Select All.

Step 8 Click Query to browse the history performance events.

Step 9 Click Save as to save the history performance events as required.

Step 10 Select Gauge, select Select All in the tab page that is displayed, and select Current Value and
Maximum/Minimum Value in the right pane.

Step 11 Click Query to browse the history performance events.

Step 12 Click Save as to save the history performance events.

Step 13 Select 24-Hour in the Monitor Period field.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
2 Routine Maintenance Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Step 14 Repeat Step 5 to Step 12 to browse the history performance events in a period of 24 hours.

----End

Related Information
For history performance events, an NE has only six 24-hour registers and sixteen 15-minute
registers for each performance indicator. Therefore, only the six most recent non-zero 24-hour
performance events and the sixteen most-recent non-zero 15-minute performance events can be
obtained from the NE. The T2000, however, automatically stores the history data reported by
NEs. Therefore, you can obtain the performance data generated in the last months.

2.3.7 Testing the IF 1+1 Switching


Periodically testing the IF 1+1 switching helps you to check whether the equipment can be
normally switched.

Prerequisite
l The T2000 is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of monitor level or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


T2000

Precautions
l The IF 1+1 switching performed manually is a HSB switching. During the 1+1 protection
switching (< 500ms), protection services are interrupted. Hence, you are recommended to
carry out 1+1 protection switching when the traffic is light.
l Before you perform the switching, ensure that the standby equipment is working properly.
If the switching fails, contact Huawei engineers for further assistance.

Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE from the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from
the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select the IF 1+1 Protection tab.

Step 3 In Protection Group, select the protection group that is to be switched over.

Step 4 In Slot Mapping Relation, right-click the IF board, and choose Manual Switch to
Protection from the shortcut menu.

Step 5 Click OK to begin the protection switching.

Step 6 Click Query to check the protection switching status.


After the switching is complete, the Switching Status of Device of the working board should
be Manual Switching.

Step 7 After the equipment runs properly for a period, query the current alarms and performance events.
There should be no new alarms or performance events.

2-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 2 Routine Maintenance Guide

Step 8 Repeat Step 1 to Step 3.

Step 9 In Slot Mapping Relation, right-click the IF board, and choose Clear from the shortcut menu.

Step 10 Click OK to restore the protection switching.

Step 11 Click Query to check the protection switching status.


The Switching Status of Device of the working board should be Normal.

Step 12 After the equipment runs properly for some time, query the current alarms and performance
events.
There should be no new alarms or performance events.

----End

2.3.8 Testing the IF N+1 Switching


Periodically testing the IF N+1 switching helps you to check whether the equipment can be
normally switched over.

Prerequisite
l The T2000 is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of maintenance level or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


T2000

Precautions
l This task helps to check whether an NE implements the N+1 protocol properly and is
designed only for test. Therefore, the service is not switched over.
l Before you perform the switching, ensure that the standby equipment is working properly.
If the switching fails, contact Huawei engineers for further assistance.

Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE from the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from
the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select N+1 Protection tab.

Step 3 In Slot Mapping Relation, right-click a working unit, and choose Exercise switching from the
shortcut menu.
The system displays a prompt message indicating that the switching command is issued
successfully.

Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 Click Query to check the protection switching status.


The status of the working unit should be Exercise switching.

Step 6 Repeat Step 1 to Step 2.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
2 Routine Maintenance Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Step 7 In Slot Mapping Relation, right-click the protection unit or a working unit, and choose Clear
from the shortcut menu.

Step 8 Click OK.

Step 9 Click Query to check the protection switching status.


The status of the working unit should be normal.

----End

2.3.9 Testing the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Switching


Periodically testing the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring switching helps you to check whether
the equipment can be switched normally.

Prerequisite
l The T2000 is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of monitor level or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


T2000

Precautions
l This task helps to check whether an NE implements the MSP protocol properly and is
designed only for test. Therefore, the service is not switched over.
l Before you perform the switching, ensure that the standby equipment is working properly.
If the switching fails, contact Huawei engineers for further assistance.

Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Ring
MSP from the Function Tree.

Step 2 In Protection Group, select the protection group that is to be switched over.

Step 3 In Slot Mapping Relation, right-click East Line, and choose Exercise switching from the
shortcut menu.

Step 4 Click OK to query the status of protection switching. The Switching Status of the east line
board should be Excise ring switching.

Step 5 Right-click the selected line, and choose Clear excise ring switching from the shortcut menu.

Step 6 Click OK to query the status of protection switching. The Switching Status of the east line
board should be Normal.

Step 7 In Slot Mapping Relation, right-click West Line of the protection group selected in Step 2,
and choose Excise ring switching from the shortcut menu.

Step 8 Repeat Step 4 to Step 6.

----End

2-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 2 Routine Maintenance Guide

2.4 Guide to Field IDU Maintenance


This guide describes how to carry out routine maintenance for the IDU and the equipment room
where the IDU is installed.

2.4.1 Cleaning the Air Filter


Periodically checking the air filter ensures that the air intake path of the fans is not blocked and
thus prevents excessively high board temperature caused by degraded heat dissipation.

Prerequisite
None.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


An air blower or a clean brush

Procedure
Step 1 Loosen the captive screws on the panel of the fan box.

Step 2 Move the cables away from the front of the panel of the fan box.

Step 3 Draw out the air filter at the left side.

Step 4 Use an air blower or a clean brush to clean the air filter.

Step 5 After the cleaning, insert the air filter back to its original position.

Step 6 Tighten the screws on the panel of the fan box.

----End

2.4.2 Testing the Orderwire Phone


Periodically testing the orderwire phone helps you to check whether the orderwire facilities are
in good condition and helps you to determine the quality of transmission links through the voice
quality.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
2 Routine Maintenance Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Prerequisite
l The NE has been correctly installed with an orderwire phone.
l The orderwire data has been correctly configured.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


None.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the status of the orderwire phone.
The orderwire phone should meet the following requirements:
l The ringing switch is set to position ON.
l The dialing mode switch is set to position T, which indicates the dual tone multi-frequency
mode.
Step 2 Make orderwire calls.
1. Place the orderwire phone off the hook, and press the "TALK" button.
The red indicator on the front of phone set should be lit and you can hear the dialing prompt
tone.
2. Make orderwire calls to other NEs.
The calls should be normal and the voice should be clear.
Step 3 Receive orderwire calls.
1. The maintenance personnel of other NEs make calls to the orderwire phone.
The phone should ring.
2. Place the orderwire phone off the hook, press the "TALK" button, and have a conversation.
The red indicator on the front of the phone set should be lit. The call should be normal and
the voice should be clear.

----End

2.4.3 Checking the Equipment Room


Periodically checking the equipment room not only ensures that the equipment can operate
normally in appropriate temperature and humidity conditions, but also reduces the fault rate, and
increases the service life of the equipment.

Prerequisite
None.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


None.

Procedure
Step 1 Record the reading of the thermometer in the equipment room.

2-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 2 Routine Maintenance Guide

The normal temperature should be between –5ºC and +45ºC.

Step 2 Record the reading of the humidity meter in the equipment room.
The normal humidity should be between 5% and 95%.

Step 3 Check whether the equipment room meets the disaster protection requirements.
Ensure the following points:
l There should be portable foam fire extinguishers in the equipment room. The fire
extinguishers should be in their service life.
l There should be no rain leakage or water penetration in the equipment room.
l There should be no mice or insects in the equipment room.

Step 4 Clean the equipment room.


Ensure that there is no dust on the cabinets, on the equipment shelves, in the equipment, on the
desks, or on the floor. The equipment should be tidy.

----End

2.5 Guide to Field Maintenance of Outdoor Equipment


This guide describes how to carry out routine maintenance on site for the outdoor equipment.

2.5.1 Checking the ODU


Periodically checking the ODU helps you to find faults and hidden troubles of the ODU in a
timely manner.

Prerequisite
None.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


None.

Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the ODU is located within the protected area of the lightning arrester.
For plain areas, the lightning arrester protects the area that is located within an angle of 45° under
it. For mountainous areas and the areas where lightning frequently occurs, the lightning arrester
protects the area that is located within an angle of 30° under it.

Step 2 Ensure that the ODU is properly fixed on the antenna.

Step 3 Ensure that the ODU is not damaged.

Step 4 Ensure that the interface between the ODU and the antenna is waterproof.

Step 5 Ensure that the protection grounding cable of the ODU is firmly and reliably grounded.

----End

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
2 Routine Maintenance Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

2.5.2 Checking the Hybrid Coupler


Periodically checking a hybrid coupler helps you to find faults and hidden troubles of the coupler
in time.

Prerequisite
None.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


None.

Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the coupler is located within the protected area of the lightning arrester.
For plain areas, the lightning arrester protects the area that is located within an angle of 45° under
it. For mountainous areas and the areas where lightning frequently occurs, the lightning arrester
protects the area that is located within an angle of 30° under it.
Step 2 Ensure that the coupler is reliably fixed on the antenna.
Step 3 Ensure that the coupler is not damaged.
Step 4 Ensure that the interface between the coupler and the antenna is waterproof.
Step 5 Ensure that the interface between the coupler and the ODU is waterproof.

----End

2.5.3 Checking the Antenna


Periodically checking an antenna helps you to find faults and hidden troubles of the antenna in
a timely manner.

Prerequisite
None.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


None.

Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the antenna is located within the protected area of the lightning arrester.
For plain areas, the lightning arrester protects the area that is located within an angle of 45° under
it. For mountainous areas and the areas where lightning frequently occurs, the lightning arrester
protects the area that is located within an angle of 30° under it.
Step 2 Ensure that the antenna is reliably fixed on the mast.
Step 3 Ensure that the antenna radome is not damaged.
Step 4 Ensure that there is no accumulated water in the antenna.

2-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 2 Routine Maintenance Guide

Step 5 Check whether the fastening bolts on the antenna are loose. Check whether the antenna slants
from the original position. Ensure that the azimuth angle and the elevation angle of the antenna
meet the design requirements.
Step 6 In the case of split mounting, ensure that the installation parts (ODU adapter, antenna adapter,
and flexible waveguide) are installed firmly, and that the connectors are fastened.
Step 7 Check and ensure that the interface of the feed boom is properly sealed and waterproof.

----End

2.5.4 Checking IF Cables


Periodically checking the IF cables helps you to find faults and hidden troubles of the cables in
a timely manner.

Prerequisite
None.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


None.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the appearance of cables.
l There should be no bent or twisted cable.
l There should be no bare copper wire.
l The bending radius of the cable should be greater than 30 cm.

Step 2 Check the cable connectors.


l The cable connector should be reliably connected to the ODU.
l The cable connector should be waterproof.

Step 3 Check the grounding of the cables.


l The grounding clip should be waterproof.
l The grounding cable should be routed from top downwards. The angle between the grounding
cable and the IF cable should not be more than 15 degrees.

----End

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 3 Emergency Maintenance Guide

3 Emergency Maintenance Guide

About This Chapter

Emergency maintenance is performed when emergencies occur or possible emergencies owing


to natural disasters may occur during the operation of the equipment.
3.1 Definition of Emergency
In the case of the microwave equipment, an emergency situation is where the microwave services
are interrupted.
3.2 Purposes of Emergence Maintenance
Emergency maintenance is performed to restore the normal operation of a system or a device
rapidly. This is different from troubleshooting, which helps to locate and rectify the faults.
3.3 Procedure of Emergency Maintenance
The procedure of emergency maintenance consists of a main procedure and a sub-procedure that
handles faults on site.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
3 Emergency Maintenance Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

3.1 Definition of Emergency


In the case of the microwave equipment, an emergency situation is where the microwave services
are interrupted.

3.2 Purposes of Emergence Maintenance


Emergency maintenance is performed to restore the normal operation of a system or a device
rapidly. This is different from troubleshooting, which helps to locate and rectify the faults.

3.3 Procedure of Emergency Maintenance


The procedure of emergency maintenance consists of a main procedure and a sub-procedure that
handles faults on site.

NOTE

In the case of emergency events, the customers in China can contact our 24-hour technical support center at
400-830-2118, and the customers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices.

3-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 3 Emergency Maintenance Guide

Main Procedure of Emergency Maintenance

Figure 3-1 Main procedure of emergency maintenance

Start

Yes
Maloperation? Cancel the operation

No

2
Contact related
Service interrupted by Yes
departments to handle
external causes?
the problem

No
3
Query NE status and alarms
by using the T2000

4
NE access successful Yes
Handle the alarm
and alarms cleared?

No

No
Rectify the fault on site Go to the next step Service restored?

5
Yes
Check the fault handling
result

End

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
3 Emergency Maintenance Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Table 3-1 Description of the main procedure of emergency maintenance


Comment Description
No.

① The common maloperations are as follows:


l Modifying the data configurations
l Performing loopback operations
l Shutting down the laser
l Muting the ODU
l Changing boards/cables
l Loading software

② Faults that occur due to external causes, such as faults of the power supply,
cables, environment, and terminal equipment (such as switching devices).

③ l If you want to perform integrated network management by using the Web


LCT, you can see 2.2.1 Checking the Status of NEs and Boards and 2.2.2
Browsing the Current Alarms for details.
l If you want to perform integrated network management by using the T2000,
you can see 2.3.1 Checking the Status of NEs and Boards and 2.3.2
Browsing the Current Alarms for details.

④ The following alarms can be cleared through the


NM:APS_MANUAL_STOP, ALM_GFP_dLFD, APS_FAIL,
BD_NOT_INSTALLED, DBMS_ERROR, ESN_INVALID, FCS_ERR,
HP_TIM, HP_UNEQ, J0_MM, LOOP_ALM, LPS_UNI_BI_M,
LP_SIZE_ERR, LP_SLM, LP_SLM_VC12, LP_SLM_VC3, LP_TIM,
LP_TIM_VC12, LP_TIM_VC3, LP_UNEQ, LP_UNEQ_VC12,
LP_UNEQ_VC3, MSSW_DIFFERENT, NESF_LOST,
NESTATE_INSTALL, NO_BD_SOFT, RADIO_MUTE,
WRG_BD_TYPE, and WRG_DEV_TYPE.

⑤ After the fault is handled, proceed as follows:


1. Check the alarms, and ensure that the system is running smoothly.
2. Arrange personnel to watch and guard the system during the peak service
hours, and be sure to solve the problems promptly, if any.
3. Fill in the sheet for on-site operations, record the fault symptoms and
handling results, and then send them to Huawei. Table 3-2 shows the sheet
for on-site operations.

Table 3-2 Sheet for on-site operations


Maintained on: year month day ; maintained by:

Actual Step Step in the Whole Handling Result Remarks


Procedure

3-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 3 Emergency Maintenance Guide

Maintained on: year month day ; maintained by:

Actual Step Step in the Whole Handling Result Remarks


Procedure

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
3 Emergency Maintenance Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Procedure of On-Site Fault Handling

Figure 3-2 Procedure of on-site fault handling

Start

Obvious Yes Repair or replace the


equipemnt
equipment
damage?

No
1
No Handle the power
PWR indicator of
input alarm
PXC lights?
Yes
2
Browse alarms
by using the
Web LCT

3
Equipment Yes
Handle the alarm
alarm?

No
4
Yes
Line alarm? Handle the alarm

No
5
High order Yes
Handle the alarm
path alarm?

No
6
Low order Yes
Handle the alarm
path alarm?

No

SDH/PDH
7
Yes
interconnection Handle the fault
fault?
No
8
Ethernet Yes
Handle the fault
service fault?

No
Locate fault by using
section-by-section No
loopback Go to the next step Service restored?

Yes

End

3-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 3 Emergency Maintenance Guide

Table 3-3 Procedure of on-site fault handling


Comment Description
No.

① The handling procedure is as follows:


1. Check whether the air circuit breaker for the input power is off. If the air
circuit breaker is automatically turned off, identify the cause (such as short
circuits or insufficient fuse capacity), and handle the fault accordingly.
2. Check the power cables, especially the power connectors, and replace the
power cables or re-make power connectors if required.
3. Check the voltage and polarization of the input power. If the voltage or
polarization of the input power does not meet the requirements, contact the
power engineers and handle the fault.
NOTE
For detailed specifications of the fuse capacity and input power, refer to section
"Powering On the Equipment" in the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU
610/620 Commissioning Guide.

② The handling procedure is as follows:


1. Refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620
Commissioning Guide and access the Web LCT.
2. Refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620
Configuration Guide and log in to the NEs.
3. Refer to 2.2.2 Browsing the Current Alarms, and browse the current
alarms.
NOTE
If you fail to log in to a created NE, ensure that the operations you performed are correct,
and then identify and rectify the fault according to the indicators of the PXC and SCC.
For details about the indicators, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Hardware Description.

③ Pay special attention to the following alarms:


l HARD_BAD
l POWER_ALM
l FAN_FAIL
l BD_STATUS
l SYN_BAD
l NESF_LOST
l TEMP_ALARM
l RADIO_RSL_HIGH
l RADIO_RSL_LOW
l RADIO_TSL_HIGH
l RADIO_TSL_LOW
l IF_INPWR_ABN
l IF_CABLE_OPEN
l VOLT_LOS

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
3 Emergency Maintenance Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Comment Description
No.

④ Pay special attention to the following alarms:


l MW_LIM
l MW_LOF
l R_LOS
l R_LOF
l R_LOC
l MS_AIS
l AU_AIS
l AU_LOP
l B1_EXC
l B2_EXC

⑤ Pay special attention to the following alarms:


l HP_LOM
l B3_EXC
l HP_UNEQ

⑥ Pay special attention to the following alarms:


l TU_AIS
l TU_LOP
l BIP_EXC
l P_LOS
l LP_UNEQ
l T_ALOS
l E1_LOC

⑦ See 4.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with the SDH Equipment or


4.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with the PDH Equipment.

⑧ See 4.8 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service Faults.

3-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 4 Troubleshooting Guide

4 Troubleshooting Guide

About This Chapter

This guide describes the general troubleshooting procedures for the OptiX RTN 600 and provides
troubleshooting methods for common faults.

4.1 General Fault Locating Procedures


When handling a fault, make a detailed record of the fault phenomenon. Contact Huawei
engineers to report problems and obtain technical support.
4.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruptions
When services cannot be transmitted due to an equipment failure or link failure, the services are
interrupted.
4.3 Troubleshooting Microwave Links
When an NE reports MW_LOF or MW_FECUNCOR due to failure or performance degrade of
a microwave link, there is a microwave link fault.
4.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors
When an NE reports an alarm or performance event on the regenerator section (RS), multiplex
section (MS), higher order path (HP), or lower order path (LP), there are bit errors in services.
4.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications
When an NE reports a large amount of justification events of the administrative unit (AU) pointer
or the tributary unit (TU) pointer, there are pointer justification faults.
4.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with the SDH Equipment
In the case that the OptiX RTN 600 is interconnected with the SDH equipment, if the SDH
service cannot be transmitted between the equipment sets, there is an interconnection fault.
4.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with the PDH Equipment
In the case that the OptiX RTN 600 is interconnected with the PDH equipment, if the PDH
service cannot be transmitted between the equipment sets, there is an interconnection fault.
4.8 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service Faults
An Ethernet service fault may be caused due to an Ethernet service interruption or Ethernet
service degradation.
4.9 Troubleshooting the Orderwire

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4 Troubleshooting Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

If orderwire calls cannot get through when services are normal, there is an orderwire fault.

4-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 4 Troubleshooting Guide

4.1 General Fault Locating Procedures


When handling a fault, make a detailed record of the fault phenomenon. Contact Huawei
engineers to report problems and obtain technical support.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4 Troubleshooting Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Figure 4-1 General fault locating procedures

Start

Record the fault phenomenon

2 Yes
Caused by external factors? Other handling procedures

3 No
Analyze fault causes and locate
the fault

Is the fault cleared? Yes

4 No

Report to Huawei

Make a solution together

Attempt to clear the fault

No
Is the service restored?

Yes

Observe the operating

No
Is the fault cleared?

Yes

Fill in the fault handling report

End

4-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 4 Troubleshooting Guide

Table 4-1 Flow description

Note Description

① When recording the fault phenomenon, make a true and detailed record of the
entire process of the fault. Record the exact time when the fault occurs, and
the operations performed before and after the fault occurs. Save the alarms,
performance events, and other important information.

② Faults that are caused by external factors include power failures, fiber faults,
environmental faults, and terminal equipment (such as switching equipment)
faults.

③ If the fault is caused by the equipment, refer to 4.2 Troubleshooting Service


Interruptions.

④ Contact Huawei engineers to report problems and obtain technical support.

4.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruptions


When services cannot be transmitted due to an equipment failure or link failure, the services are
interrupted.

Fault Causes
l There are incorrect operations.
The data is wrongly modified. A board or cable is looped back or replaced.
l The transmission NE or link is faulty.
l There is an interconnection fault.
If the transmission equipment and connections are working normally, check whether there
is a fault in the interconnection between the transmission equipment and the switching
equipment.

Fault Locating Methods


1. Check the operations performed before the service interruption.
2. Query the alarms through the NMS, and locate the fault based on the alarms.
If several NEs report the alarms, analyze the alarms in the following sequence: switching
failure alarms, equipment alarms, line alarms, HP alarms, and LP alarms.
3. Perform loopback operations section by section. Otherwise, replace the components.

CAUTION
If the fault cannot be rectified in a short time, first restore the services. Adjust the service routes
or perform a forced switching operation to restore the services.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4 Troubleshooting Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Fault Locating Procedures

Figure 4-2 Flow of handling service interruptions

Start

Yes
Maloperation? Cancel the operation

No

2
Contact related
Service interrupted Yes
departments to handle
by external causes?
the problem

No
3
Query NE status and alarms
by using the T2000

4
NE access successful Yes Handle the alarm
and alarms cleared?

No
No
Rectify the fault on site Go to the next step Service restored?

Yes

End

4-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 4 Troubleshooting Guide

Table 4-2 Flow description


Note Description

① Operations that may cause a service interruption are as follows:


l Modifying the data configuration
l Performing loopback operations
l Shutting down the laser
l Muting the ODU
l Replacing boards/cables
l Software loading

② Faults that occur due owing to external causes, such as faults of the power
supply, cables, environment, and terminal equipment (such as switching
devices).

③ l If you want to perform integrated network management by using the Web


LCT, you can see 2.2.1 Checking the Status of NEs and Boards and 2.2.2
Browsing the Current Alarms.
l If you want to perform integrated network management by using the T2000,
you can see 2.3.1 Checking the Status of NEs and Boards and 2.3.2
Browsing the Current Alarms.

④ The following alarms can be cleared through the


T2000:APS_MANUAL_STOP, ALM_GFP_dLFD, APS_FAIL,
BD_NOT_INSTALLED, DBMS_ERROR, ESN_INVALID, FCS_ERR,
HP_TIM, HP_UNEQ, J0_MM, LOOP_ALM, LPS_UNI_BI_M,
LP_SIZE_ERR, LP_SLM, LP_SLM_VC12, LP_SLM_VC3, LP_TIM,
LP_TIM_VC12, LP_TIM_VC3, LP_UNEQ, LP_UNEQ_VC12,
LP_UNEQ_VC3, MSSW_DIFFERENT, NESF_LOST,
NESTATE_INSTALL, NO_BD_SOFT, RADIO_MUTE,
WRG_BD_TYPE, and WRG_DEV_TYPE.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4 Troubleshooting Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Figure 4-3 Procedure of on-site fault handling

Start

Obvious Yes Repair or replace the


equipemnt
equipment
damage?

No
1
No Handle the power
PWR indicator of
input alarm
PXC lights?
Yes
2
Browse alarms
by using the
Web LCT

3
Equipment Yes
Handle the alarm
alarm?

No
4
Yes
Line alarm? Handle the alarm

No
5
High order Yes
Handle the alarm
path alarm?

No
6
Low order Yes
Handle the alarm
path alarm?

No

SDH/PDH
7
Yes
interconnection Handle the fault
fault?
No
8
Ethernet Yes
Handle the fault
service fault?

No
Locate fault by using
section-by-section No
loopback Go to the next step Service restored?

Yes

End

4-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 4 Troubleshooting Guide

Table 4-3 Procedure of on-site fault handling


Comment Description
No.

① The handling procedure is as follows:


1. Check whether the air circuit breaker for the input power is off. If the air
circuit breaker is automatically turned off, identify the cause (such as short
circuits or insufficient fuse capacity), and handle the fault accordingly.
2. Check the power cables, especially the power connectors, and replace the
power cables or re-make power connectors if required.
3. Check the voltage and polarization of the input power. If the voltage or
polarization of the input power does not meet the requirements, contact the
power engineers and handle the fault.
NOTE
For detailed specifications of the fuse capacity and input power, refer to section
"Powering On the Equipment" in the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU
610/620 Commissioning Guide.

② The handling procedure is as follows:


1. Refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620
Commissioning Guide and access the Web LCT.
2. Refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620
Configuration Guide and log in to the NEs.
3. Refer to 2.2.2 Browsing the Current Alarms, and browse the current
alarms.
NOTE
If you fail to log in to a created NE, ensure that the operations you performed are correct,
and then identify and rectify the fault according to the indicators of the PXC and SCC.
For details about the indicators, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Hardware Description.

③ Pay special attention to the following alarms:


l HARD_BAD
l POWER_ALM
l FAN_FAIL
l BD_STATUS
l SYN_BAD
l NESF_LOST
l TEMP_ALARM
l RADIO_RSL_HIGH
l RADIO_RSL_LOW
l RADIO_TSL_HIGH
l RADIO_TSL_LOW
l IF_INPWR_ABN
l IF_CABLE_OPEN
l VOLT_LOS

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4 Troubleshooting Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Comment Description
No.

④ Pay special attention to the following alarms:


l MW_LIM
l MW_LOF
l R_LOS
l R_LOF
l R_LOC
l MS_AIS
l AU_AIS
l AU_LOP
l B1_EXC
l B2_EXC

⑤ Pay special attention to the following alarms:


l HP_LOM
l B3_EXC
l HP_UNEQ

⑥ Pay special attention to the following alarms:


l TU_AIS
l TU_LOP
l BIP_EXC
l P_LOS
l LP_UNEQ
l T_ALOS
l E1_LOC

⑦ See 4.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with the SDH Equipment or


4.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with the PDH Equipment.

⑧ See 4.8 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service Faults.

Experience and Summary


Perform routine maintenance operations to reduce the possibility of faulty equipment. Solve the
problems before the services are affected.

4.3 Troubleshooting Microwave Links


When an NE reports MW_LOF or MW_FECUNCOR due to failure or performance degrade of
a microwave link, there is a microwave link fault.

4-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 4 Troubleshooting Guide

The key to locating a microwave link fault is to check whether the transmit power and the receive
power are abnormal, and to check whether there is an external interference.

In the following two cases, the transmit power is abnormal. The first case is that the transmit
power exceeds the range that the ODU supports. The second case is that the difference between
the transmit power and the set value is more than 2 dB when the ATPC is disabled. The relevant
alarms and performance events are as follows:

l RADIO_TSL_HIGH
l RADIO_TSL_LOW
l TSL_CUR
l TSL_MAX
l TSL_MIN
NOTE

For a detailed description of the range of the transmit power, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission
System Product Description.

In the following two cases, the RSL is abnormal. The one case is that the receive power is under
the lower threshold of the planned RSL. The second case is that the receive power is lower than
the receiver sensitivity or higher than the free space receive power due to fading. The relevant
alarms and performance events are as follows:

l RADIO_RSL_HIGH
l RADIO_RSL_LOW
l RSL_CUR
l RSL_MAX
l RSL_MIN
NOTE

For a detailed description of the receiver sensitivity, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
Product Description.

Generally, external interference is classified into co-channel interference and adjacent channel
interference.

l Co-channel interference is crosstalk from two different radio transmitters reusing the same
frequency channel. Therefore, the entire spectrum may be impaired.
l Adjacent channel interference is signal impairment to one frequency due to presence of
another signal on a nearby frequency. Therefore, a part of the spectrum is impaired.

Because interference is closely related to the frequency in use, the transmission over a microwave
link may be faulty in one direction only.

Fault Causes

Table 4-4 Causes of microwave link faults

Fault Common Fault Causes

The transmit power is The ODU is faulty.


abnormal.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4 Troubleshooting Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Fault Common Fault Causes

The receive power is always l The antenna direction is not properly adjusted.
lower than the ideal value. l The antennas have different polarization directions.
l There is a mountain or obstacle in the transmit direction.
l The performance of the feeder degrades.

The receive power is There is an external interference.


abnormal due to slow up-
fading.

The receive power is The fading margin is not sufficient.


abnormal due to slow down-
fading.

The receive power is The multipath fading is fast.


abnormal due to fast fading.

The microwave link is faulty There is external interference.


in one direction.

NOTE

Depending on the received level, there is up fading and down fading.


l Up fading
The received level is higher than the value after free space fading. The difference can be 10-odd decibels.
l Down fading
The received level is lower than the value after free space fading. The difference can be tens of decibels.
Depending on the fading time, there is fast fading and slow fading.
l Fast fading
The fading duration time ranges from several milliseconds to tens of seconds.
l Slow fading
The fading duration time ranges from tens of seconds to several hours.
Because slow down fading and fast fading are imposed by the propagation paths, the microwave link may be
faulty in both directions.

Fault Locating Methods


1. Check whether the ODU is mute, powered off, or looped back. Check whether the data
configuration is correct.
2. Check whether the ODU and the IF board are faulty.
3. If the transmit power is abnormal, replace the ODU.
4. If the receive power is abnormal, check out the possible causes based on the fading type.
5. If the microwave link is faulty in only one direction, check whether there is interference
before you proceed.
6. If the transmit/receive power is normal, perform loopback operations.

4-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 4 Troubleshooting Guide

Fault Locating Procedures

Figure 4-4 Flow of handling microwave link faults

Start

1 Yes
Is there a wrong
Cancel the operation
operation?

No

2 Is there an ODU or IF Yes


Handle the alarm
board related fault?

No
3
No
Normal transmit power? Handle the fault

Yes

4
The receive power Yes
always lower than the Handle the fault
ideal value?

No
5
Abnormal receive Yes
power caused by slow up- Handle the fault
fading?

No
6
Abnormal receive Yes
power caused by slow Handle the fault
down-fading?

No

7
Abnormal receive Yes
power caused by fast Handle the fault
fading?

No

8
Microwave link Yes
fault in one Handle the fault
direction?

No
9
No
Perform loopback operations Go to the next step Is the fault cleared?

Yes

End

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4 Troubleshooting Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Table 4-5 Flow description


Note Description

① Check the following points:


l Check whether the ODU is powered off.
l Check whether the ODU is muted.
l Check whether the IF board is looped back.
l Check whether the data configuration at the transmit end is the same as the
data configuration at the receive end.
l Check whether the data configuration matches the type of the ODU and
the hybrid coupler.

② Pay special attention to:


l HARD_BAD
l TEMP_ALARM
l IF_INPWR_ABN
l RADIO_MUTE
l RADIO_TSL_HIGH
l RADIO_TSL_LOW
l RADIO_RSL_HIGH
l IF_CABLE_OPEN

③ Replace the ODU.

④ Follow the steps below:


1. Check the installation of the antenna. Check whether the azimuth angle of
the antenna meets the requirement.
2. Check the antenna direction. Check whether the received signal is from the
main lobe.
If the antenna direction does not meet the requirement, adjust the antenna
in a wide range.
3. Check whether the setting of the polarization direction of the antenna is
correct. Adjust wrong polarization direction.
4. Check whether the antenna gain at both the transmit and receive sides meets
the indexes. Replace unqualified antennas.
5. Check whether there is a mountain or obstacle in the transmit direction.

4-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 4 Troubleshooting Guide

Note Description

⑤ Follow the steps below:


1. Check whether there is co-channel interference.
1. Mute the opposite ODU.
2. Check the RSL at the local end. If the RSL exceeds –90 dBm, you can
infer that there is co-channel interference that may impair the long-term
availability and performance of the system.
2. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source.
3. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference
spectrum or change plans to reduce the interference.

⑥ Contact the network planning department to make the following changes:


l Increase the installation height of the antenna.
l Reduce the transmission distance.
l Increase the antenna gain.
l Increase the transmit power.

⑦ Contact the network planning department to make the following changes:


l Adjust the position of the antenna to block the reflected wave or make the
reflection point fall on the ground that has a small reflection coefficient,
thus reducing the multipath fading.
l Adjust the RF configuration to make the links in the 1+1 SD configuration.
l For the links in the 1+1 SD configuration, adjust the height difference
between two antennas to make the receive power of one antenna much
stronger than that of another.
l Increase the fading margin.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4 Troubleshooting Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Note Description

⑧ The handling procedure is as follows:


1. Check whether there is co-channel interference.
1. Mute the opposite ODU.
2. Check the RSL at the local end. If the RSL exceeds –90 dBm, you can
infer that there is co-channel interference that may impair the long-term
availability and performance of the system.
2. Check whether there is adjacent channel interference.
1. Mute the opposite ODU.
2. Adjust the microwave working mode at the local end and use the
minimum channel spacing.
3. Decrease the received frequency at the local end by a half of the channel
spacing.
4. Test and record the RSL.
5. Increase the received frequency at the local end, with a step length of
0.5 MHz or 1 MHz, and record the RSL accordingly until the received
frequency is equal to the original received frequency plus a half of the
channel spacing.
6. Compare the recorded RSLs, and check whether the RSL in a certain
spectrum is abnormal if the received frequency is within the permitted
range.
3. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source.
4. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference
spectrum or change plans to reduce the interference.

⑨ Follow the steps below:


1. Loop back the IF ports.
If the fault is not cleared after the loopback, replace the IF board.
2. Check whether the IF cable is soggy, broken or pressed. Replace the
unqualified cable.
3. Check whether the cable connector is made in accordance with
specifications. Remake unqualified ones.
4. Replace the ODU.
If the fault is cleared after the replacement, the original ODU is faulty.
5. Replace the IF cable.
If the fault is cleared after the replacement, the original IF cable is faulty.

Experience and Summary


l During a commissioning process, make sure that the antenna direction is correctly adjusted
to prevent possible incipient faults.
l Periodically collect the change data of the transmit power and receive power, and analyze
the change data to remove incipient faults in time.

4-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 4 Troubleshooting Guide

4.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors


When an NE reports an alarm or performance event on the regenerator section (RS), multiplex
section (MS), higher order path (HP), or lower order path (LP), there are bit errors in services.

The line board detects RS bit errors by the RS overhead byte B1. Related alarms and performance
events are listed below:

l B1_EXC
l B1_SD
l RS_CROSSTR
l RSBBE
l RSES
l RSSES
l RSCSES
l RSUAS
NOTE

When the IF board works in the PDH mode, the above RS bit error alarms and performance events may also be
reported. Such alarms and performance events are detected by the B1 that is defined in the PDH microwave
frame.

The line board detects MS bit errors by the MS overhead byte B2. Related alarms and
performance events are listed below:

l B2_EXC
l B2_SD
l MS_CROSSTR
l MSBBE
l MSES
l MSSES
l MSCSES
l MSUAS

The line board detects HP bit errors by the HP overhead byte B3. Related alarms and performance
events are listed below:

l B3_EXC
l B3_SD
l HP_CROSSTR
l HPBBE
l HPES
l HPSES
l HPCSES
l HPUAS

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4 Troubleshooting Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

LP bit errors are detected by PDH service processing boards or Ethernet service processing
boards using the VC-3 overhead byte B3 or VC-12 overhead byte V5. Related alarms and
performance events are listed below:

l B2_EXC
l B2_SD
l B3_EXC_VC3_
l B3_SD_VC3
l BIP_EXC
l BIP_SD
l LP_CROSSTR
l VC3BBE
l VC3ES
l VC3SES
l VC3CSES
l VC3UAS
l LPBBE
l LPES
l LPSES
l LPCSES
l LPUAS

Fault Causes

Table 4-6 Causes of bit errors

Fault Type Common Cause

There are some RS bit errors. l The line is faulty.


– For the optical fiber line, the optical power is abnormal,
the fiber performance degrades, or the fiber connector
is not clean.
– For the STM-1 cable line, the cable performance
degrades, the cable is not properly grounded, or the cable
connector is not in good contact.
– For the microwave line, check whether there is an
MW_FECUNCOR alarm or an HSB_INDI alarm.
l The line board is faulty.
l The clock unit is faulty.
l The quality of the clock over the network degrades.
When the quality of the clock over the network degrades,
there will be a pointer justification event.

4-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 4 Troubleshooting Guide

Fault Type Common Cause

There is no RS bit error, but l The line board is faulty.


there are MS bit errors or HP l The quality of the clock over the network degrades.
bit errors.
When the quality of the clock over the network degrades,
there will be a pointer justification event.
l The working temperature of the line board is excessively
high.
l There is power surge or an external interference source, or
the equipment is not properly grounded.

There are only LP bit errors. l The PDH service processing board or the Ethernet service
processing board is faulty.
l The cross-connect unit is faulty.
l The working temperature of the PDH service processing
board or the Ethernet service processing board is
excessively high.
l The working temperature of the cross-connect unit is
excessively high.
l There is power surge or an external interference source, or
the equipment is not properly grounded.

Fault Locating Methods


1. Analyze the equipment alarms and performance events that are related to bit errors.
2. When there are many types of alarms and performance events, first analyze RS bit errors,
then MS bit errors, HP bit errors, and finally LP bit errors.
3. When multiple paths have bit errors, first check whether the overlapping part is faulty.
4. When the fault is not located after you analyze the alarms and performance events, perform
loopback operations section by section.
5. For a possibly degraded component, replace it with a new one.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4 Troubleshooting Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Fault Locating Procedures

Figure 4-5 Flow of handling bit errors

Start

2
1
Is there an Yes
Handle the alarm
equipment alarm?

No

Is there a pointer Yes Handle the pointer


justification event? justification event

SDH optical 3
No interface board Handle the RS bit error of the
SDH optical interface board

4
Is there an If the
Yes IF board Handle the RS bit error of the
RS bit error alarm or a alarming
performance IF board
board is
event?
5
STM-1 electrical
No Handle the RS bit error of the
interface board
STM-1 electrical interface
board

6
Is there an
MS/HP alarm or a Yes
Handle the MS/HP bit error
performance
event?
No
7
Yes
Is there an LP alarm? Handle the LP bit error

No
Go to the next No
Is the fault cleared?
step

Perform loopback operations


section by section Yes

End

Table 4-7 Flow description


Note Description

① Pay special attention to:


l TEMP_ALARM
l SYN_BAD
l HARD_BAD

4-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 4 Troubleshooting Guide

Note Description

② Refer to 4.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications.

③ Follow the steps below:


1. Interchange the Tx fiber core and the Rx fiber core at both ends of the path.
If bit errors change after the exchange, the fiber is faulty. Otherwise, the
equipment at the two ends is faulty.
2. In the case that the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber between the
equipment and the ODF and the section of the fiber that is led out of the
equipment room are pressed. In addition, check whether the fiber connector
is clean.
3. In the case that the equipment at the two ends is faulty, use a fiber jumper
to loop back the optical ports. After the loopback, if the fault is not cleared,
the line board is most likely to be faulty.
4. For the case that the equipment at the two ends is faulty, to locate the fault,
you can also replace the board or make an exchange between the board and
another board of the same type that is working normally. If the alarm
changes after the exchange, the board is faulty.

④ Follow the steps below:


1. Check whether there is an MW_FECUNCOR alarm or an HSB_INDI
alarm.
2. If yes, refer to 4.3 Troubleshooting Microwave Links.
3. If no, replace the IF board.

⑤ Follow the steps below:


1. Make an exchange between the Tx cable and the Rx cable at both ends of
the path. If bit errors change after the exchange, the cable is faulty.
Otherwise, the equipment at the two ends is faulty.
2. In the case that the cable is faulty, check the cable connector. Also check
whether the cable is properly grounded and if the cable is broken.
3. In the case that the equipment at the two ends is faulty, use a cable to loop
back the electrical ports. After the loopback, if the fault is not cleared, the
line board is most likely faulty.
4. For the case that the equipment at the two ends is faulty, to locate the fault,
you can also replace the board or make an exchange between the board and
another board of the same type that is working normally. If the alarm
changes after the exchange, the board is faulty.

⑥ Follow the steps below:


1. Loop back the alarming line board.
If the fault is not cleared, replace the line board.
If the fault is cleared, replace the line board at the transmit side.
2. If the fault is still not cleared, check whether there is power surge or an
external interference source, or if the equipment is not properly grounded
(primarily for the SDH electrical interface board).

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4 Troubleshooting Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Note Description

⑦ Follow the steps below:


1. Replace the PDH service processing board or the Ethernet service
processing board or the cross-connect board based on how the service paths
that have bit errors overlap each other, .
2. If the fault is not cleared, check whether there is power surge or an external
interference source, or if the equipment is properly grounded.

Experience and Summary


l Check bit error performance events and handle them routinely in time.
l To locate a fault, primarily use the method of analyzing alarms and performance events.
In addition, consider the loopback method and the replacement method.

4.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications


When an NE reports a large amount of justification events of the administrative unit (AU) pointer
or the tributary unit (TU) pointer, there are pointer justification faults.

When the position of the first byte of the VC-4 in the AU-4 payload changes, the AU pointer
makes a justification accordingly. The performance events of the AU pointer justification are as
follows:

l AUPJCHIGH
l AUPJCLOW
l AUPJCNEW
NOTE

The AU pointer justification is generated at an upstream NE but is detected and reported at a downstream NE.

When the service is configured to be at the VC-12 level, apply the re-framing process to terminate
the AU pointer justification. The terminating method is to transform the AU pointer justification
into the TU pointer justification. The performance events of the TU pointer justification are as
follows:

l TUPJCHIGH
l TUPJCLOW
l TUPJCNEW
NOTE

The TU pointer justification is generated at the NE where the AU pointer is transformed into the TU pointer,
but is detected and reported by the tributary board of the NE where services are terminated.

Fault Causes
l The clock sources or the clock source levels are wrongly configured. As a result, there are
two clock sources in the same network or mutual clock tracing occurs.
l The optical fibers links are wrongly connected. As a result, mutual clock tracing occurs.

4-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 4 Troubleshooting Guide

l The quality of the clock source degrades, the clock unit is faulty, or there are other clock
related faults.
l The tributary board is faulty (only for the TU pointer justification).

Fault Locating Methods


When there are both AU pointer justifications and TU pointer justifications in a service path,
first handle AU pointer justifications and then TU pointer justifications.

Fault Types Fault Locating Methods

AU pointer justifications 1. Analyze and clear clock alarms.


2. Correct wrong data configurations and wrong fiber
connections.
3. Change the clock and service configurations to find the
stations whose clock is asynchronous with the entire
network.
4. Replace the components whose performance is possibly
poor or degraded to locate a fault.

TU pointer justifications 1. Analyze and clear clock alarms.


2. Correct wrong data configurations and wrong fiber
connections.
3. Change the clock and service configurations to find the
stations whose clock is asynchronous with the entire
network.
4. Replace the components whose performance is possibly
poor or degraded to locate a fault.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4 Troubleshooting Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Fault Locating Procedures

Figure 4-6 Flow of handling pointer justifications

Start

1 Is there a clock related Yes


Handle the alarm
alarm?

No
2
Check the clock
configuration

Yes Modify the data


Wrong configuration?
configuration

No
3

Check the fiber connection

Yes
Wrongly connected? Re-connect the fiber

No
4 5
Is there an AU pointer Yes Find the NE whose clock is
out of synchronization Locate the faulty board
justification event?

No
6 7

Is there a TU pointer Yes Find the NE whose clock is


Find the faulty board
justification event? out of synchronization

No
No
Go to the next step Is the fault cleared?

Yes

End

4-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 4 Troubleshooting Guide

Table 4-8 Flow description


Note Description

① Pay special attention to:


l TEMP_ALARM
l SYN_BAD
l HARD_BAD
l LTI
l SYNC_C_LOS
l S1_SYN_CHANGE
l EXT_SYNC_LOS

② Check the following points:


l Check whether there are two clock reference sources in the entire network.
l Check whether mutual clock tracing occurs.

③ Query ECC routes to check if the fibers are correctly connected. Check the fiber
connection in the east and west directions of the NE that reports the pointer
justification event.

④ Follow the steps below:


1. Find a VC-4 channel that reports an AU pointer justification event.
2. Along the service source direction of the VC-4 channel, find the source NE of
the entire VC-4 service (not the source NE of a timeslot in the VC-4).
3. Set the clock of the source NE to free-run. Set other NEs to trace the clock of
the source NE along the direction of the VC-4 service.
4. Along the clock tracing direction, find the line board that is the first to report
the AU pointer justification of the VC-4 channel.
The clock of the remote NE to which the line board is connected is
asynchronous with the reference clock. Hence, the line board in the remote NE
that receives the clock signal, the line board that sends the clock signal to the
remote NE, and the clock unit of the remote NE, may be faulty.
5. Set the clock of the sink NE of the VC-4 service to free-run. Set other NEs to
trace the clock of the sink NE along the direction of the VC-4 service.
6. Along the clock tracing direction, find the line board that is the first to report
the AU pointer justification of the VC-4 channel.
The clock of the remote NE to which the line board is connected is
asynchronous with the reference clock. Hence, the line board in the remote NE
that receives the clock signal, the line board that sends the clock signal to the
remote NE, and the clock unit of the remote NE, may be faulty.
7. Compare the results and find out the common points.

⑤ Replace the possibly faulty boards.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4 Troubleshooting Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Note Description

⑥ Follow the steps below:


1. Modify the service configuration to make the NE where the clock reference
source is as the central NE. Other NEs has the E1 service of the central NE.
2. Along the clock tracing direction, find the NE that is the first to report the TU
pointer justification.
The clock of the NE is asynchronous with the reference clock. Hence, the line
board in the NE that receives the clock signal, the line board that sends the
clock signal to the NE, and the clock unit of the NE, may be faulty.
3. Modify the configuration data to make all NEs trace the clock in another
direction.
4. Along the clock tracing direction, find the NE that is the first to report the TU
pointer justification.
The clock of the NE is asynchronous with the reference clock. Hence, the line
board in the NE that receives the clock signal, the line board that sends the
clock signal to the NE, and the clock unit of the NE, may be faulty.
5. Compare the results and find out the common points.
NOTE
This method is also applicable in locating an AU pointer justification event.

⑦ Replace the possibly faulty boards. For a TU pointer justification, check the line
board, the clock board, and the tributary board.

Experience and Summary


In a well synchronized network, there are few pointer justifications (less than six per day). Hence,
monitoring the pointer of an SDH transmission system is an effective way to check the
synchronization of the system.

4.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with the SDH


Equipment
In the case that the OptiX RTN 600 is interconnected with the SDH equipment, if the SDH
service cannot be transmitted between the equipment sets, there is an interconnection fault.

Fault Causes
l The VC-12 numbering method of the OptiX equipment is different from the numbering
method of the equipment of certain vendors.
The OptiX equipment applies the timeslot numbering method. The numbering formula is:
VC-12 number = TUG-3 number + (TUG-2 number - 1) x 3 + (TU-12 number - 1) x 21.
This method is also called ordering method.
Some equipment applies the line numbering method. The numbering formula is: VC-12
number = (TUG-3 number - 1) x 21 + (TUG-2 number - 1) x 3 + TU-12 number. This
method is also called interval method.

4-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 4 Troubleshooting Guide

l The overhead bytes at the two sides are inconsistent.


l The indexes of SDH interfaces do not meet requirements.
l The equipment is not properly grounded (only for the STM-1 electrical interface).
NOTE

When the interconnected equipment is the ATM or Ethernet equipment, the common cause for the
interconnection fault is that the service is not set to the VC-4 pass-through service. As a result, the overheads
are processed in the terminating mode instead of the pass-through mode.

Fault Locating Methods


Analyze the fault phenomenon and alarms. Check the possible fault causes one by one.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-27


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4 Troubleshooting Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Fault Locating Procedures

Figure 4-7 Flow of troubleshooting the interconnection with the SDH equipment

Start

Is the
Set the interconnection
interconnected equipment Yes
service to be the VC-4 pass-
the ATM/IP equipment?
through service

No
Query the VC-12 numbering
method of the interconnected
equipment

Is the Modify the data configuration.


Yes
numbering mode the Use the line numbering
line numbering? method to set the VC-12

No

1 Is there an overhead Yes


setting related alarm? Handle the alarm

No
2

Is the interface the Yes


Check the grounding
STM-1 electrical
interface?

3 No

Test the indexes of interfaces

Do the interfaces meet No Handle the faults of the


relevant standards? interconnected equipment

Yes Go to the next No


step Is the fault cleared?

Handle the faults of the local Yes


equipment

End

4-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 4 Troubleshooting Guide

Table 4-9 Flow description


Note Description

① Pay special attention to:


l J0_MM
l HP_TIM
l LP_TIM
l LP_TIM_VC12
l LP_TIM_VC3
l HP_SLM
l LP_SLM
l LP_SLM_VC12
l LP_SLM_VC3

② Check the following points:


l Check if all the equipment and the DDF in the equipment room are jointly
grounded.
l Check if the shielding layer of the coaxial cable connector on the DDF is
connected to the protection ground.
l Check if the shielding layers of coaxial cables are grounded in the same
way.
NOTE
Disconnect all the signal cables between the interconnecting equipment. Use a
multimeter to measure the level between the shielding layers of the coaxial cables at the
receive and transmit ends of the SDH equipment. In addition, measure the level between
the shielding layers of the coaxial cables at the receive and transmit ends of the opposite
equipment. If the potential difference is large (about 0.5 V), the fault may be caused by
the grounding.

③ Common indexes of the optical interfaces:


l Mean launched optical power
l Extinction ratio
l Operating wavelength of the laser
l Receiver sensitivity
l Overload optical power
l Permitted frequency deviation of the input interface
l Output jitter
l Jitter and wander tolerance
Common indexes of the electrical interfaces:
l Permitted frequency deviation of the input interface
l Allowed attenuation of the input interface
l Input jitter and wander tolerance
l Output jitter

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-29


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4 Troubleshooting Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Experience and Summary


To clear any interconnection fault, you need to have a knowledge of the characteristics of the
interfaces of the interconnected equipment.

4.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with the PDH


Equipment
In the case that the OptiX RTN 600 is interconnected with the PDH equipment, if the PDH
service cannot be transmitted between the equipment sets, there is an interconnection fault.

Fault Causes
l There is an impedance mismatch between interfaces.
l The equipment is not properly grounded.
l The cable performance degrades.
l The indexes of PDH interfaces do not meet the requirements.

Fault Locating Methods


Analyze the fault phenomenon and alarms. Check the possible fault causes one by one.

4-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 4 Troubleshooting Guide

Fault Locating Procedures

Figure 4-8 Flow of troubleshooting the interconnection with the PDH equipment

Start

1
Check the impedance of
the interfaces

Is there an Yes Replace the cable or the


impedance mismatch?
tributary board

No
2
Is the cable the Yes
Check the grounding
coaxial cable?

No
3

Check the cables

No
Is in good conditions? Adjust the cables

4 Yes
Test the indexes of
interfaces

Do the interfaces No Handle the faults of the


meet standards? interconnected equipment

Yes Go to the next No


Is the fault cleared?
step

Yes
Handle the faults of the
local equipment

End

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-31


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4 Troubleshooting Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Table 4-10 Flow description


Note Description

① Check whether the type of the tributary board matches the type of the cable.

② Check the following points:


l Check whether all the equipment and the DDF in the equipment room are
jointly grounded.
l Check whether the shielding layer of the coaxial cable connector on the
DDF is connected to the protection ground.
l Check whether the shielding layers of coaxial cables are grounded in the
same way.
NOTE
Disconnect all the signal cables between the interconnecting equipment. Use a
multimeter to measure the level between the shielding layers of the coaxial cables at the
receive and transmit ends of the PDH equipment. Also measure the level between the
shielding layers of the coaxial cables at the receive and transmit ends of the opposite
equipment. If the potential difference is large (about 0.5 V), the fault may be caused by
the grounding.

③ Check the following points:


l Check whether the wires of the cable are correctly connected.
l Check whether the cable is very long (for example, longer than 50 meters).
l Check whether the cable is broken or pressed.
l Check whether the cable signal is interfered (for example, when the trunk
cable is bound with the power cable, the cable signal is interfered by the
power signal).

④ Check the following indexes:


l Input jitter tolerance
l Permitted input frequency deviation
l Input reflection attenuation
l Output jitter
l Output frequency deviation
l Output waveform

Experience and Summary


Grounding problems are the most common reasons that cause an interconnection failure when
the OptiX RTN 600 is interconnected with the PDH equipment.

4.8 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service Faults


An Ethernet service fault may be caused due to an Ethernet service interruption or Ethernet
service degradation.
Ethernet service interruption indicates that the Ethernet service is completely interrupted.
Ethernet service degradation indicates that the Ethernet service is abnormal. For example, the

4-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 4 Troubleshooting Guide

network speed is low, the equipment delay is long, loss of packets occurs, or incorrect packets
exist in the received or transmitted data.

Fault Causes
l There human-caused faults are as follows:
– An Ethernet board loopback or a transmission line loopback occurs.
– The settings of parameters of an Ethernet port such as port enabled, working mode, and
flow control are different from those of its interconnected equipment.
– The configuration of the encapsulation/mapping protocol or the LCAS protocol is
different from that of the opposite equipment.
– The VCTRUNK-bound timeslot is different from that of the opposite equipment.
– The service configuration is incorrect.
l The equipment faults are as follows:
– The line board is faulty or has bit errors.
– The interconnected equipment is faulty.
– The network cable is faulty.
– The external electromagnetic interference is severe.

Fault Locating Methods


1. Rectify the human-caused faults such as a loopback and data configuration error.
2. Locate the fault cause according to the equipment alarm.
3. Locate the fault cause according to the RMON performance event and alarm.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-33


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4 Troubleshooting Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Fault Locating Procedures

Figure 4-9 Flow of handling Ethernet service faults

Start

1
Yes
Incorrect operation? Roll back this operation.

No
2
Equipment Yes
or line alarm? Handle the alarm.

No
3
Yes
Ethernet interface Handle the alarm.
alarm?
No
4
Yes
Ethernet protocol Handle the alarm.
alarm?
No
5
Abnormal RMON Yes Troubleshoot according to
performance? the flow of handling the
RMON performance event.
No

Fault of the Yes


Troubleshoot faults of the
opposite equipment?
opposite equipment.

No
Troubleshoot equipment
Proceed No Are faults
faults by performing
with the cleared?
loopbacks section by
next step.
section or replacing boards.
Yes

End

4-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 4 Troubleshooting Guide

Table 4-11 Flow description


Note Description

① Check the following points:


l Whether a loopback is set for the Ethernet board
l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission line
l Whether the settings of parameters of an Ethernet port such as port enabled,
working mode, and flow control are the same as those of its interconnected
equipment
l Whether the configuration of the encapsulation/mapping protocol or the
LCAS protocol is the same as that of the opposite equipment
l Whether the VCTRUNK-bound timeslot is the same as that of the opposite
equipment
l Whether the service configuration is correct, especially the VLAN tag–
related port attributes and network attributes and the parameters of the
VLAN filtering table

② Check the following equipment alarms:


l POWER_ALM
l FAN_FAIL
l HARD_BAD
l BD_STATUS
l SYN_BAD
l NESF_LOST
l TEMP_ALARM
l RADIO_RSL_HIGH
l RADIO_RSL_LOW
l RADIO_TSL_HIGH
l RADIO_TSL_LOW
l IF_INPWR_ABN
Check the following line alarms:
l MW_LIM
l MW_LOF
l R_LOS
l R_LOF
l MS_AIS
l AU_AIS
l AU_LOP
l B1_EXC
l B2_EXC

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-35


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4 Troubleshooting Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Note Description

③ Check the following:


l ETH_LOS
l ALM_GFP_dCSF

④ Check the following:


l ALM_GFP_dLFD
l FCS_ERR
l LCAS_PLCT
l LCAS_TLCT
l LCAS_PLCR
l LCAS_TLCR
l LCAS_FOPT
l LCAS_FOPR

⑤ For RMON performance events, refer to OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission
System Feature Description.

4-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 4 Troubleshooting Guide

Figure 4-10 Flow of handling RMON abnormal performance events

Start

1
Analyze the RMON
performance.

2
Collisions or Yes Check the working
fragements? mode of a port.

No
3
Yes
FCS errors? Handle the fault.

No
4
Yes Handle the flow
PAUSE frame? control problem or
add bandwidths.
No
5
Excessive Yes
broadcast Handle the fault.
packets?
No

Test with a meter.

Yes Troubleshoot faults of


Pass the test?
the opposite equipment.

No
6
Yes
MTU setting
Modify the MTU value.
errors?

No
Proceed No Are faults
Troubleshoot equipment
with the cleared?
faults by performing
next step.
loopbacks section by
section or replacing boards. Yes

End

Table 4-12 Flow description


Note Description

① Refer to OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-37


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4 Troubleshooting Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Note Description

② Check the following points:


l Whether the port operating rate of this equipment is the same as that of its
interconnected equipment
l Whether the duplex/half-duplex mode of ports on this equipment is the
same as that on its interconnected equipment
l Do not set one port to auto-negotiation and the opposite port to full-duplex.

③ The handling procedure is as follows:


l Check the Ethernet cable. If the Ethernet cable is not qualified, replace it
with a new one.
l Access the Ethernet services by using another Ethernet port. If the new port
does not report the "FCS error " of RMON performance, you can infer that
the hardware of the previous port is faulty. Otherwise, you can infer that
the hardware of the Ethernet port at the opposite side is faulty.

④ Check the following points:


l Whether the flow control mode of this equipment is the same as that of its
interconnected equipment
l Whether the Ethernet service volume is larger that the configured
VCTRUNK bandwidth

⑤ Identify the causes of generating excessive broadcast packets, such as


loopback over the Ethernet port or incorrect setting of the VB filtering table,
and handle the problem accordingly. If the fault lies in the opposite equipment,
you can reduce the number of broadcast packets by setting a broadcast packet
suppression threshold for the Ethernet port.

⑥ The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) of a network can be tested by a test


meter. The maximum frame length that is set for a port must be longer than
this maximum network MTU.

Experience and Summary


Understand the features, working mode, and configured protocols of interfaces on Ethernet
equipment, which is required to troubleshoot Ethernet faults.

4.9 Troubleshooting the Orderwire


If orderwire calls cannot get through when services are normal, there is an orderwire fault.

Fault Causes
l The phone set is incorrectly set.
l The phone line is wrongly connected.
l The orderwire is incorrectly configured.
l The SCC board is faulty.

4-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 4 Troubleshooting Guide

l The line board is faulty.

Fault Locating Methods


l Check whether the phone set is correctly set, whether the phone line is correctly connected,
and whether the orderwire is correctly configured.
l Replace the possibly faulty board to locate the fault.

Fault Locating Procedures

Figure 4-11 Flow of handling orderwire faults

Start

Check the phone setting

Is the phone No
Modify the phone setting
correctly set?

Yes

Is the phone line No


Re-connect the phone line
correctly connected?

Yes
2
Check the orderwire
configuration

Is the configuration No
Modify the configuration
correct?

3 Yes
Replace the possibly faulty
board
Go to the next No
Is the fault cleared?
step

Yes

End

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-39


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4 Troubleshooting Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Table 4-13 Flow description


Note Description

① Check the following points:


l Check whether the ring current switch "RING" on the phone set is set to
"ON".
l Check whether the dialing mode switch is set to "T", that is, the dual tone
multi-frequency mode.
l An orderwire phone set should be on-hook when it is not in communication,
and the upper-right red indicator in the front view of the orderwire phone
set should be off.
If the red indicator is on, it indicates that the phone set is in the off-hook
state. Press the "TALK" button in front of phone set to hook it up. In certain
occasions the "TALK" button is pressed by the maintenance personnel due
to carelessness. This makes the phone set stay in the off-hook state all the
time and the orderwire call from other NEs cannot get through.

② Check the following points:


l Check whether all orderwire phone numbers in a subnet are of the same
length.
l Check whether all orderwire phone numbers in a subnet are unique.
l Check whether the overhead bytes of all NEs in a subnet are the same.
l Check whether the orderwire port is correctly set.

③ Replace the SCC board and the line board that extracts the orderwire byte to
locate the faulty board.

Experience and Summary


It is necessary to periodically check the orderwire phone set.

4-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide

5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide

About This Chapter

This topic describes the operations of loopback, resetting, PRBS test over the E1 interface, using
the Ethernet test frame, setting the working state of the ODU, turning on/shutting down the laser,
part replacement, and fiber connector and adapter cleaning that are commonly used in
maintenance.

5.1 Loopback
Loopback is a process in which a signal is sent to the device under test, which then returns the
signal to the originator.
5.2 Resetting
Resetting is an important method for handling software faults. The OptiX RTN 600 supports
cold resetting, warm resetting, and SCC resetting.
5.3 PRBS Test
The PRBS test is an important method for network self-check and network maintenance. In the
absence of a dedicated test tool, you can perform a PRBS test by using the embedded test system
on the PDH interface board.
5.4 Using the Ethernet Test Frames
By using the Ethernet test frames in the OptiX RTN 600, you can check the connectivity of the
VCTRUNK.
5.5 Setting the State of the ODU Transmitter
In the OptiX RTN 600, the state of the ODU transmitter can be mute or unmute. When the
transmitter of the ODU is unmute, the ODU transmits and receives microwave signals. When
the transmitter is mute, the ODU only receives signals.
5.6 Setting the State of the Laser
The laser on the port of the optical interface board transmits optical signals only when the laser
is turned on. You can turn on or shut down the laser through the NM.
5.7 Setting the Automatic Release Function
An NE can automatically release the loopback operation or enable the laser after a default period
of five minutes. You can customize the related settings through the NM.
5.8 Part Replacement

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Part replacement is a method frequently used to locate faults. The replacement operation varies
with the part types.
5.9 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters
The optical connecting components are easily contaminated in the maintenance. The minute dust
particles that can be seen only in the microscope can also affect the quality of optical signals. In
this case, it downgrades the system performance. Hence, clean the fiber connectors or adapters
that are terminated in a timely manner.

5-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide

5.1 Loopback
Loopback is a process in which a signal is sent to the device under test, which then returns the
signal to the originator.

Loopback is a very important test method. Based on the implementing methods, loopbacks can
be classified into:

l Hardware loopback
Hardware loopback is a loopback implemented by changing the physical connections.
l Software loopback
Hardware loopback is a loopback implemented through software design.

In the IDU 610/620 system, the SDH optical interface board, SDH electrical interface board,
PDH interface board, IF board, and Ethernet board support the loopback function.

The ODU supports inloop over the RF boards.

5.1.1 Setting Loopback for the SDH Optical Interface Board


The optical interface board (SL1/SD1/SL4) of the OptiX RTN 600 supports optical interface
outloops and VC-4 path outloops. The SL4 also supports VC-4 path inloops.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT has a normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of maintenance level or higher.

Context
Optical interface inloop is a process where the SDH signal is looped back at the overhead
processing unit towards the backplane.

Figure 5-1 Optical interface inloop

SDH optical
Backplane interface board

SDH

Optical interface outloop is a process where the SDH signal is looped back at the overhead
processing unit towards the remote equipment.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Figure 5-2 Optical interface outloop

SDH optical
Backplane interface board

SDH

VC-4 path outloop is a process where the VC-4 signal is looped back at the logic processing unit
towards the remote equipment.

Figure 5-3 VC-4 path outloop

SDH optical
Backplane
interface board

VC-4

VC-4 path inloop is a process where the VC-4 signal is looped back at the logic processing unit
towards the backplane.

Figure 5-4 VC-4 path inloop

SDH optical
Backplane
board

VC-4

Precaution

CAUTION
l Loopback may interrupt the services on the port or the path for which the loopback is
performed.
l A software loopback may be automatically released within a period (five minutes by default).
For details, refer to 5.7 Setting the Automatic Release Function.

5-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Select SDH optical interface board in the object tree.

Step 2 In the function tree, choose Configuration > SDH Interface.

Step 3 Select By Function, and select the loopback mode in the drop-down list.

To Perform ... Select ...


Optical interface loopback Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback
VC-4 path loopback VC4 Loopback

Step 4 Set the loopback status of the port as required.

Step 5 Click Apply.


The system displays a prompt dialog box for confirmation.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

5.1.2 Setting Loopback for the SDH Electrical Interface Board


The electrical interface board of the OptiX RTN 600 supports the inloop/outloop of the electrical
interface and the outloop of the VC-4 path.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT has a normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the "maintenance level" authority or higher.

Context
For the inloop of the electrical interface, an SDH signal is looped back at the coding/decoding
unit of the board to the backplane.

Figure 5-5 Electrical interface inloop

SDH electrical
Backplane interface board

SDH

For the outloop of the electrical interface, an SDH signal is looped back at the coding/decoding
unit of the board to the remote equipment.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Figure 5-6 Electrical interface outloop

SDH electrical
Backplane
interface board

SDH

For the outloop of the VC-4 path, a VC-4 signal is looped back at the logic processing unit of
the board to the remote equipment.

Figure 5-7 VC-4 path outloop

SDH electrical
Backplane interface board

VC-4

Precaution

CAUTION
l Loopback can interrupt the services on the port or the path for which the loopback is
performed.
l A software loopback may be automatically released within a period (five minutes by default).
For details, refer to 5.7 Setting the Automatic Release Function.

Procedure
Step 1 Select an SDH electrical interface board from the NE Explorer.

Step 2 Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Select By Function, and select a loopback mode from the drop-down list.

To Perform ... Select ...


Electrical interface loopback Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback
VC-4 path loopback VC4 Loopback

Step 4 Set the loopback status of the port or path as required.

5-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide

Step 5 Click Apply.


A prompt dialog box for confirmation is displayed.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

5.1.3 Setting Loopback of the PDH Interface Board


The PDH interface board supports the tributary inloop/outloop.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT has a normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the "maintenance level" authority or higher.

Context
For the tributary inloop, a PDH signal is looped back at the coding/decoding unit of the board
to the backplane.

For the tributary outloop, a PDH signal is looped back at the coding/decoding unit of the board
to the remote equipment.

Figure 5-8 Tributary inloop

Backplane PDH interface board

PDH

For the tributary outloop, a PDH signal is looped back at the coding/decoding unit of the board
to the remote equipment.

Figure 5-9 Tributary outloop

Backplane PDH interface board

PDH

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Precaution

CAUTION
Loopback can interrupt the services on the port or the path for which the loopback is performed.

Procedure
Step 1 Select a PDH interface board from the Object Tree.

Step 2 Choose Configuration > Interface from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Select By Function, and select Tributary Loopback in the drop-down list.

Step 4 Set the loopback status of the path as required.

Step 5 Click Apply.


The system displays a prompt dialog box for confirmation.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

5.1.4 Setting Loopback on the IF Board


Loopbacks on the IF board are classified into IF port loopbacks, port loopbacks, and VC-4 path
loopbacks. The IF1A/IF1B supports IF port inloops/outloops and VC-4 path inloops. The IF0A/
IF0B supports IF port inloops/outloops and port inloops/outloops. The IFX supports port inloops/
outloops and VC-4 path inloops.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of maintenance level or higher.

Context
IF port inloop is a process where the IF signal is looped back at the modem unit of the board
towards the backplane.

Figure 5-10 IF port inloop

Backplane IF board
IF signal

5-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide

IF port outloop is a process where the IF signal is looped back at the modem unit of the board
towards the remote equipment.

Figure 5-11 IF port outloop

Backplane IF board
IF signal

Port inloop is a process where the microwave signal is loopbacked at the MUX/DEMUX unit
of the board towards the backplane.

Figure 5-12 Port inloop

Backplane IF board
Microwave
baseband signal

Port outloop is a process where the microwave signal is loopbacked at the MUX/DEMUX unit
of the board towards the remote equipment.

Figure 5-13 Port outloop

Backplane IF board
Microwave
baseband
signal

VC-4 path inloop is a process where the VC-4 signal is looped back at the logic processing unit
of the board towards the backplane.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Figure 5-14 VC-4 path inloop

Backplane IF board

VC-4 signal

Precaution

CAUTION
l Loopback may interrupt the services on the port or in the path where the loopback operation
is performed.
l A software loopback may be automatically released within a period (five minutes by default).
For details, refer to 5.7 Setting the Automatic Release Function.

Procedure
Step 1 Select an IF board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.
Step 2 Choose the menus from the Function Tree.

To Perform ... Choose ...


IF port loopback Configuration > IF Interface
Port loopback Configuration > Digital Interface
VC-4 path loopback Configuration > Digital Interface

Step 3 Select By Function, and then select the loopback mode in the drop-down list.

To Perform ... Choose ...


IF port loopback IF Port Loopback
Port loopback Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback
VC-4 path loopback VC4 Loopback

Step 4 Set the loopback status of the port as required.


Step 5 Click Apply.
The system displays a prompt dialog box for confirmation.
Step 6 Click OK.

----End

5-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide

5.1.5 Setting Loopback of the Ethernet Service Processing Board


The Ethernet service processing board of the OptiX RTN 600 supports Ethernet port inloops (at
the MAC Layer and PHY layer) and VC-3 path inloops and outloops.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of maintenance level or higher.

Context
A MAC layer inloop is an inloop where the service processing module loops back the Ethernet
physical signals towards the backplane direction through the MAC layer. A PHY layer internal
inloop is an inloop where the interface module loops back the Ethernet frame signals towards
the backplane direction through the PHY layer.

Figure 5-15 Inloop over an Ethernet port

Ethernet service
Backplane
processing board

MAC PHY

VC-3 path inloop is an inloop where the logic processing unit of a board loops back the signals
in a specific VC-3 path towards the backplane direction.

Figure 5-16 VC-3 path inloop

Backplane Ethernet service


processing board
VC-3 signal

VC-3 path inloop is an inloop where the logic processing unit of a board loops back the signals
in a specific VC-3 path towards the remote equipment.

Figure 5-17 VC-3 path outloop

Ethernet service
Backplane
processing board
VC-3 signal

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Precautions

CAUTION
l A loopback operation may interrupt the services on the port or in the path where the loopback
is conducted.
l A loopback in a VC-3 path may be automatically released within a period (five minutes by
default). For details, refer to 5.7 Setting the Automatic Release Function.

Procedure
Step 1 Select an Ethernet processing board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.

Step 2 Choose the menus from the Function Tree.

To Perform... Choose...
Loopback at the PHY Layer, Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management >
Ethernet Interface
Loopback at the MAC Layer, Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management >
Ethernet Interface
Loopback in the VC-3 path Configuration > SDH Interface

Step 3 Select the loopback type.

To Perform... Choose...
Loopback at the PHY Layer, PHY Loopback
Loopback at teh MAC Layer, MAC Loopback
Loopback in the VC-3 path VC3 Loopback

Step 4 Set the loopback status of the port or path as required.

Step 5 Click Apply.


The system displays a prompt dialog box for confirmation.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

5.1.6 Setting Loopback of the ODU


In the OptiX RTN 600, the ODU supports RF port inloops.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of maintenance level or higher.

5-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide

Context
An RF inloop is an inloop where the Diplexer of the ODU loops back the RF signals towards
the IF board direction.

Figure 5-18 RF inloopback

IF board ODU

RF signal

Precautions

CAUTION
Because the loopback over an IF port may cause serious accidents, familiarize yourself with the
following precautions when performing loopback operations:
l During the loopback, the services on the related IF port are interrupted.
l During the loopback, the IF board can handle only the services in the first four VC-12s (IF1A/
IF1B) or the services on the first five E1 ports (IF0A/IF0B). The IFX board does not support
RF loopbak. The IF board in STM-1 mode does not support RF loppback.
l During the loopback, the NE may interfere with the nearby radio communication equipment
of which the receive or transmit frequency is lower than the lowest transmit frequency of the
ODU.
l During the loopback, do not modify the IF port-related or ODU-related parameters.
l If the system is configured with the 1+1 protection, to prevent the switching from occurring
during loopback, perform the forced switching to fix the service on the link where RF
loopback is to be performed before RF loopback is performed.
l During the loopback on an ODU that is configured in 1+1 FD mode, interference may arise
between the active and standby microwave links.
l Some types of ODUs do not support loopback over the RF port.

Procedure
Step 1 Select an ODU from the NE Explorer.

Step 2 Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Select By Function, and select RF Loopback from the drop-down list.

Step 4 Set the loopback status of the port as required.

Step 5 Click Apply.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

The system displays a prompt dialog box for confirmation.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

5.2 Resetting
Resetting is an important method for handling software faults. The OptiX RTN 600 supports
cold resetting, warm resetting, and SCC resetting.

5.2.1 Cold Resetting


Cold resetting is a process where the board software is reset and the board is re-initiated. Except
that the board software of the EMS6 is independently located, the software modules of all other
boards are located in the SCC. During the board initialization, the FPGA, if any, is re-loaded.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of maintenance level or higher.

Precautions

CAUTION
Cold resetting causes service interruption because it is similar to the procedure of removing and
inserting a board.

Procedure
Step 1 In the slot layout of the T2000, right-click the board to be cold reset.

Step 2 Choose Cold Reset in the popup menu.


The system displays the Operation success dialog box.

Step 3 Click Close.

----End

5.2.2 Warm Resetting


Warm resetting is a process where the board software is reset but the board is not re-initiated.
Except that the board software of the EMS6 is independently located, the software modules of
all other boards are located in the SCC.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.

5-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide

l The NE user has the authority of maintenance level or higher.

Precautions
During the warm resetting, the running services are not affected.

Procedure
Step 1 In the slot layout of the T2000, right-click the board to be reset.

Step 2 Choose Warm Resetting in the popup menu.


The system displays the Operation succeeded dialog box.

Step 3 Click Close.

----End

5.2.3 SCC Resetting


SCC resetting is a process in which all the software modules on the SCC are reset, the SCC is
re-initiated.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of maintenance level or higher.

Precautions
During the resetting, protection switching and NMS operations are unavailable although the
running services are not affected.

Procedure
Step 1 In the slot layout of the T2000, right-click the SCC to be reset.

Step 2 Choose SCC Reset in the popup menu.


The system displays the following prompt dialog box: Resetting the SCC board may result
in lost communication. Are you sure to continue?

Step 3 Click OK.


The system displays the Operation succeeded dialog box.

Step 4 Click Close.

----End

5.3 PRBS Test


The PRBS test is an important method for network self-check and network maintenance. In the
absence of a dedicated test tool, you can perform a PRBS test by using the embedded test system
on the PDH interface board.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of maintenance level or higher.

Context
The PRBS test in the tributary direction can be used to check the connection between the PDH
interface board and the DDF, as shown in Figure 5-19.

Figure 5-19 PRBS test in the tributary direction


DDF frame PDH interface board

PRBS
Transmitter

PRBS
Recevicer

1 Inloop at the DDF frame

The PRBS test in the cross-connect direction can be used to check the connection between the
PDH interface board and the remote NE, as shown in Figure 5-20.

Figure 5-20 PRBS test in the cross-connect direction


a) IF board working as line board

PDH interface Cross-connect


board board IF board IF board
PRBS OUT

Transmitter
1 2 3
PRBS
IN
Receiver

Local NE Remote NE
VC4 inloop or
1 2 IF port inloop 3 IF port outloop
port inloop

5-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide

b) SDH optical/electrical board working as line board

PDH interface Cross-connect SDH optical/ SDH optical/


board board electrical board electrical board
PRBS OUT

Transmitter
1 2 3
PRBS
IN
Receiver

Local NE Remote NE

1 VC4 inloop 2 Port inloop 3 Port outloop

Precautions

CAUTION
l During the PRBS test, the services in the tested path are interrupted.
l The PRBS test can only be conducted in one path and in one direction.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the loopback. For details, refer to Figure 5-19 and Figure 5-20.

Step 2 Select an PDH board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.

Step 3 Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
The PRBS Test tab page is displayed.

Step 4 Select the port to be tested.

Step 5 Specify Direction, Duration, and Measured in Time.


NOTE

l The PRBS test supports three time units: one second, 10 minutes, and one hour.
l A maximum of 255 test cycles is permissible for the PRBS test.

Step 6 Optional: Select Accumulating Mode.

Step 7 Click Start the test.


The system displays the following prompt dialog box: The operation may interrupt the
service. Are you sure to continue?

Step 8 Click OK.

Step 9 When Progress in the PRBS Test tab page is displayed as 100%, click Query to check the test
result.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

NOTE

The result of a PRBS test can be normal, error, or invalid.


l Normal: Indicates that the path is working properly. The number of PRBSs should be zero, and the
curve should be green.
l Error: Indicates that the path has errors. The number of total PRBSs should be greater than zero, and
the curve should be red.
l Invalid: Indicates that no bit is received. The curve should be yellow.

----End

5.4 Using the Ethernet Test Frames


By using the Ethernet test frames in the OptiX RTN 600, you can check the connectivity of the
VCTRUNK.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of maintenance level or higher.
l The service traffic is encapsulated or mapped by using the GFP method.

Context
For test purposes, the Ethernet board sends, at an interval of about one second, one specific GFP
management frame or one specific Ethernet frame to the peer Ethernet board, which then returns
with a response frame. After receiving the response frame, the Ethernet board at the local end
can determine the connectivity of the VCTRUNK in between.

Figure 5-21 Ethernet test frames between Ethernet boards

Test frame

Local Remote
Ehernet Ehernet
board board
Response frame

Precautions

CAUTION
Never use the test frames when the network traffic is heavy.

Procedure
Step 1 Select an Ethernet board from the NE Explorer.

5-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide

Step 2 Choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Test from the Function Tree.
The Ethernet Test tab page is displayed.

Step 3 Select the port to be tested, click Clear Counters and choose Clear All Counters from the
drop-down list.

Step 4 Specify Send Mode and Frames to Send.


NOTE

Huawei recommends that you choose "Burst mode", and a maximum of 10 frames can be transmitted each
time.

Step 5 Click Apply.

Step 6 When Status changes to Finished Sending, click Query.

Step 7 Check Counter of Frames Sent and Counter of Received Response of Test Frame.
Test frames are used to check the network connectivity. If some of the test frames are lost but
no alarm is reported on the SDH side, you can infer that the network connectivity is in good
condition. If all the test frames are lost, you can infer that network disconnection arises.

----End

Related Information
If you choose the "Continue" mode, the local port transmits test frames continuously until the
test is disabled.

5.5 Setting the State of the ODU Transmitter


In the OptiX RTN 600, the state of the ODU transmitter can be mute or unmute. When the
transmitter of the ODU is unmute, the ODU transmits and receives microwave signals. When
the transmitter is mute, the ODU only receives signals.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of maintenance level or higher.

Context
When the transmitter of the ODU is unmute, the actual transmit power of the ODU takes the
preset value if the ATPC is disabled. The actual transmit power of the ODU, however, is a little
bit different from the preset value if the ATPC is enabled.

Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE from the NE Explorer.

Step 2 Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Select the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

Step 4 Click the slot icon of the ODU, and specify TX Status.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Step 5 Click Apply.

----End

5.6 Setting the State of the Laser


The laser on the port of the optical interface board transmits optical signals only when the laser
is turned on. You can turn on or shut down the laser through the NM.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of maintenance level or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Select an SDH optical interface board from the NE Explorer.

Step 2 Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree, and then click the SDH
Interface tab.
Step 3 Select By Function.

Step 4 Select Laser Switch from the drop-down list.

Step 5 Select a port, and set Laser Switch.

Step 6 Click Apply.

----End

5.7 Setting the Automatic Release Function


An NE can automatically release the loopback operation or enable the laser after a default period
of five minutes. You can customize the related settings through the NM.

Prerequisite
l The Web LCT is in normal communication with the NE.
l The NE user has the authority of maintenance level or higher.

Precautions
NOTE

The PDH interface board does not support the loopback and automatic release functions.

Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.

Step 2 Choose Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Specify Auto Disabling and Auto Disabling Time (min).

5-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

5.8 Part Replacement


Part replacement is a method frequently used to locate faults. The replacement operation varies
with the part types.

Table 5-1 Part replacement description


Part Name Operation

SD1, SL1, SL4 5.8.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board

SLE and SDE 5.8.4 Replacing the SDH Electrical Interface Board

PO1, PH1, PD1, and PL3 5.8.5 Replacing the PDH Interface Board

EFT4 and EMS6 5.8.7 Replacing the IF Board

IF1A, IF1B, IFX, IF0A, and 5.8.7 Replacing the IF Board


IF0B

PXC 5.8.8 Replacing the PXC Board

SCC 5.8.9 Replacing the SCC Board

FAN 5.8.10 Replacing the Fan Board

ODU 5.8.11 Replacing the ODU

5.8.1 Removing a Board

Procedure
Step 1 Insert one end of the ESD wrist strap into the ESD connector on the cabinet. Wear the ESD wrist
strap.
Step 2 If the board is connected with cables, remove the cables after marking them.
Step 3 Loosen the screws on the panel of the board.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Figure 5-22 Removing a board (1)

Step 4 Hold the left and right ejector levers with hands. Push them outwards to disengage the board
from the backplane.

Figure 5-23 Removing a board (2)

Step 5 Pull out the board gently along the guide rail in the slot. At this time, the board is in a parallel
manner.

Figure 5-24 Removing a board (3)

5-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide

CAUTION
Remove the board slowly, to prevent the components on the boards from colliding.

Step 6 Put the removed board into the antistatic box or bag.

----End

5.8.2 Inserting a Board

Procedure
Step 1 Insert one end of the ESD wrist strap into the ESD connector on the cabinet. Wear the ESD wrist
strap.
Step 2 Hold the ejector levers with hands on the panel. Push them outwards so that the angle between
the ejector lever and the panel is 45 degrees or so.
Step 3 Push the board gently along the slot guide rail until the board cannot slide further.

Figure 5-25 Inserting a board (1)

CAUTION
Insert the board slowly, to prevent the components on the boards from colliding.

Step 4 Press the two ejector levers inward with force.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Figure 5-26 Inserting a board (2)

Step 5 Tighten screws on the panel.

Figure 5-27 Inserting a board (3)

Step 6 If the board is connected to cables originally, connect the cables based on the label marked on
them.

----End

5.8.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board


When the SDH optical interface board is replaced, the service of the board without any protection
is interrupted.

Prerequisite
l Know the impact of board replacement.
l Know the specific position of the board to be replaced.
l Know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.
l Make sure that the spare SDH optical interface board is at hand and that the version and
type of the spare board are consistent with those of the board to be replaced.
NOTE

You can identify the type of a board through the board feature code in the bar code on the ejector lever.

5-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


l Antistatic wrist strap
l Screwdriver
l Web LCT or T2000

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarm of the board using the Web LCT or T2000, and record the result.

Step 2 When the service of the board to be replaced is the working service configured with the SNCP,
use the Web LCT or T2000 to perform the forced switching of the service.

Step 3 Refer to 5.8.1 Removing a Board, and remove the board.

Step 4 Make sure that the version and SFP type of the spare board are consistent with those of the board
to be replaced.

Step 5 Refer to 5.8.2 Inserting a Board, and insert the spare board.

Step 6 When the board is working, observe the indicators.


The STAT indicator should light on as green.

Step 7 If the SNCP forced switching was performed for the service, use the Web LCT or T2000 to
cancel it.

Step 8 Query the current alarm of the board using the Web LCT or T2000.
There should be no newly added alarms.

----End

5.8.4 Replacing the SDH Electrical Interface Board


When the SDH electrical interface board is replaced, the service of the board without any
protection is interrupted.

Prerequisite
l Know the impact of board replacement.
l Know the specific position of the board to be replaced.
l Know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.
l The spare SDH electrical interface board is at hand, and is of the same version as the board
to be replaced.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


l Antistatic wrist strap
l Screwdriver
l Web LCT or T2000

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarm of the board using the Web LCT or T2000, and record the result.

Step 2 When the service of the board to be replaced is the working service configured with the SNCP,
use the Web LCT or T2000 to perform the forced switching of the service.

Step 3 Refer to 5.8.1 Removing a Board, and remove the board.

Step 4 Make sure the version of the spare board is consistent with that of the board to be replaced.

Step 5 Refer to 5.8.2 Inserting a Board, and insert the spare board.

Step 6 When the board is working, observe the indicators.


The STAT indicator should light on as green.

Step 7 If the SNCP forced switching was performed for the service, use the Web LCT or T2000 to
cancel it.

Step 8 Query the current alarm of the board using the Web LCT or T2000.
There should be no newly added alarms.

----End

5.8.5 Replacing the PDH Interface Board


When the PDH interface board is replaced, the services of the board are interrupted.

Prerequisite
l Know the impact of board replacement.
l Know the specific position of the board to be replaced.
l Know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.
l Make sure that the spare PDH interface board is at hand and that the version and type of it
are consistent with the board to be replaced.
NOTE
The E1 interface boards PO1 and PH1 both have two types: A and B. The A type is of 75-ohm interface
impedance, and the B type 120-ohm. Identify them by the bar code on the board ejector lever.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


l Antistatic wrist strap
l Screwdriver
l Web LCT or T2000

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarm of the board using the Web LCT or T2000, and record the result.

Step 2 Refer to 5.8.1 Removing a Board, and remove the board.

Step 3 Make sure the version and type of the spare board are consistent with those of the board to be
replaced.

5-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide

Step 4 Refer to 5.8.2 Inserting a Board, and insert the spare board.

Step 5 When the board is working, observe the indicators.


The STAT indicator should light on as green.

Step 6 Query the current alarm of the board using the Web LCT or T2000.
There should be no newly added alarms.

----End

5.8.6 Replacing the Ethernet Service Processing Board


When the Ethernet service processing board is replaced, the services on this board are
interrupted.

Prerequisite
l Know the impact of board replacement.
l Know the specific position of the board to be replaced.
l Know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.
l The backup part for the Ethernet service processing board must be available on site. The
version of the backup part must be the same as those of the board to be replaced. For the
EMS6 board, the type of the backup part must also be the same as those of the board to be
replaced.
NOTE

You can identify the type of a board through the board feature code in the bar code on the ejector lever.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


l Antistatic wrist strap
l Screwdriver
l Web LCT or T2000

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarm of the board using the Web LCT or T2000, and record the result.

Step 2 Refer to 5.8.1 Removing a Board, and remove the board.

Step 3 Check whether the version and type of the backup part are the same as those of the board to be
replaced.

Step 4 Refer to 5.8.2 Inserting a Board, and insert the spare board.

Step 5 When the board is working, observe the indicators.


The STAT indicator should light on as green.

Step 6 Query the current alarm of the board using the Web LCT or T2000.
There should be no newly added alarms.

----End

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-27


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

5.8.7 Replacing the IF Board


If the IF board is not configured with 1+1 protection and the services of the board are not
configured with any protection, the services on the board are interrupted during board
replacement. If the IF board is configured with XPIC, the XPIC-related services are also affected.

Prerequisite
l Know the impact of board replacement.
l Know the specific position of the board to be replaced.
l Make clear the configuration of the board 1+1 protection.
l Know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.
l Make sure that the spare IF board is at hand and that the version and type of it are consistent
with those of the board to be replaced.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


l Antistatic wrist strap
l Screwdriver
l Web LCT or T2000

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarm of the board using the Web LCT or T2000, and record the result.

Step 2 When the board to be replaced is the working board configured with the 1+1 protection, use the
Web LCT or T2000 to perform the forced switching of the board.
After the successful switching, perform the step 4.

Step 3 When the service of the board to be replaced is the working service configured with the SNCP,
use the Web LCT or T2000 to perform the forced switching of the service.

Step 4 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch of the IF board to be replaced.

Step 5 Refer to 5.8.1 Removing a Board, and remove the board.

Step 6 Make sure the version and type of the spare IF board are consistent with those of the board to
be replaced.

Step 7 Make sure that the ODU-PWR switch on the spare IF board is in the off position.

Step 8 Refer to 5.8.2 Inserting a Board, and insert the spare board.

Step 9 When the board is working, observe the indicators.


The STAT indicator should light on as green.

Step 10 Turn on the ODU-PWR switch of the IF board.

Step 11 If the SNCP forced switching was performed for the service, use the Web LCT or T2000 to
cancel it.

Step 12 If the 1+1 protection forced switching of the board was performed, use the Web LCT or T2000
to cancel it.

5-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide

Step 13 Query the current alarm of the board using the Web LCT or T2000.
There should be no newly added alarms.

Step 14 After you replace the IF1A/IF1B board, you should re-load and re-activate the FPGA file by
referring to the upgrade guide if the new board reports a NO_BD_SOFT alarm.

----End

5.8.8 Replacing the PXC Board


If the PXC board is not configured with the 1+1 backup, all services of the system are interrupted
during this process.

Prerequisite
l Know the impact of board replacement.
l Know the specific position of the board to be replaced.
l Make clear the configuration of the board 1+1 protection.
l Make sure that the spare PXC board is at hand and that the version is consistent with that
of the board to be replaced.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


l Antistatic wrist strap
l Screwdriver
l Web LCT or T2000

Precaution
When the PXC is configured with 1+1 protection and only one-channel power is accessed, it is
recommended to provide one-channel -48 V/-60 V power for the standby PXC board
temporarily. After the board is replaced, stop providing power for the standby board. This can
ensure that the equipment does not power off during the PXC replacement.

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarm of the board using the Web LCT or T2000, and record the result.

Step 2 When the board to be replaced is the active board configured with the 1+1 protection, perform
the active and standby switching using the Web LCT or T2000.
1. Select an NE from the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection
from the Function Tree.
2. Select a PXC protection group.
3. Click Working/Protection Switching.
4. Click OK to begin the protection switching.

Step 3 Turn off the SYS-PWR switch of the PXC board to be replaced.

Step 4 Turn off the switch of the power that provides power for the PXC board to be replaced.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-29


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Step 5 Make sure that the version and type of the spare board are consistent with those of the board to
be replaced.

Step 6 Turn on the switch of the power that provides power for the PXC board.

Step 7 Turn on the SYS-PWR switch of the PXC board.

Step 8 If the switching is performed before the replacement, perform a switchover operation on the
Web LCT or T2000 to make the working board be the active board, not the standby board.
1. Select an NE from the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection
from the Function Tree.
2. Select a PXC protection group.
3. Click Working/Protection Switching.
4. Click OK to begin the protection switching.

Step 9 Query the current alarm of the board using the Web LCT or T2000.
There should be no newly added alarms.

----End

5.8.9 Replacing the SCC Board


During this process, any NM operation and switching cannot be performed.

Prerequisite
l Know the impact of board replacement.
l Know the specific position of the board to be replaced.
l Make sure that the spare SCC is at hand and that the version of it is consistent with that of
the board to be replaced.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


l Antistatic wrist strap
l Screwdriver
l Web LCT or T2000

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarm of the board using the Web LCT or T2000, and record the result.

Step 2 Press the RST button on the SCC front panel.


During the reset of the SCC board, the PROG indicator is on, off, flashing, and off sequentially.

Step 3 When the PROG indicator is operating, Refer to section 3.2.1 Removing a Board, remove the
board.

Step 4 Make sure the version and the jumper settings of the spare board are consistent with those of the
board to be replaced.

Step 5 Remove the board to be replaced and portable memory card of the spare board.
1. Wear the ESD wrist strap.

5-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide

2. Remove the screws on the portable memory card and pull the connector of the memory
card out from the socket of the dual edge connector on the SCC board.

Figure 5-28 Remove the portable memory card

Step 6 Install the portable memory card of the board to be replaced onto the spare board.

Step 7 Refer to 5.8.2 Inserting a Board, and insert the spare board.

Step 8 When the board is working, observe the indicators.


The STAT and PROG indicators should be lit green.

Step 9 Query the current alarm of the board using the Web LCT or T2000.
There should be no newly added alarms.

----End

5.8.10 Replacing the Fan Board


As the IDU cannot perform the air cooling during the process, replace the fan board quickly.

Prerequisite
Make sure that the spare fan board is at hand and that the version of it is the same as that of the
board to be replaced.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


l Antistatic wrist strap
l Screwdriver
l Web LCT or T2000

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarm of the board using the Web LCT or T2000, and record the result.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-31


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Step 2 Loosen the captive screws on the panel of the fan tray assembly.

Step 3 Move cables away from the front panel of the fan tray assembly.

Step 4 Pull out the fan tray assembly.

Figure 5-29 Pulling out the fan tray assembly

NOTE

If the IDU is installed in a dust-proof environment, there is no air filter.

Step 5 Remove the fan board gently and horizontally along the guide rail.

Figure 5-30 Removing the fan board

WARNING
Before the fan stops, do not touch the blades.

Step 6 Make sure the version of the spare board is consistent with that of the board to be replaced.

Step 7 Insert the spare board steadily along the guide rail.

Step 8 Install the panel of the fan tray assembly to the original position.

Step 9 Tighten the captive screws on the panel.

Step 10 Observe the indicator on the panel.

5-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide

The FAN indicator should be lit green.

Step 11 Query the current alarm of the board using the Web LCT or T2000.
There should be no newly added alarms.

----End

5.8.11 Replacing the ODU


When the ODU is not configured with protection and the service transmitted by the ODU is not
provided with protection, the associated service is interrupted during the ODU replacement.

Prerequisite
l The influence of replacing the ODU must be acknowledged.
l The specific locations of the ODU to be replaced and the IF board that is connected to the
ODU must be specified.
l Spare ODU must be available on site, and the spare part must be the same as those to be
replaced in version and type

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


l Torque spanner
l Web LCT or T2000
l Silicon
l Waterproof adhesive tape

Precautions
l Before you replace an ODU installed on the coupler, power off the ODU to be replaced,
but do not power off or mute the other ODU. Otherwise, the services may be affected. The
interface of the coupler ejects little RF radiation, and thus meets the safety standards for
microwave radiation.
l The following procedure illustrates only how to replace the ODU with a waveguide
interface.

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarm of the ODU using the Web LCT or T2000, and record the result.

Step 2 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the panel of the IF board.

Step 3 Disconnect the IF cable and grounding cable of the ODU.

Step 4 Loosen the four latches of the ODU and disconnect the ODU from the antenna or the hybrid
coupler.

Step 5 Make sure the type of the spare ODU is consistent with that of the ODU to be replaced.

Step 6 Install the ODU.


1. Remove the protective cap on the antenna interface of the ODU.
2. Wearing gloves, dispense appropriate amount of lubricant on the sealing packing ring.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-33


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

CAUTION
Do not dispense the lubricant on the front panel of the feeder. Otherwise, it may affect the
signal transmission.

3. Align the antenna interface of the ODU with the feeder and then insert it to the feeder.
Make sure that the four hooks are engaged with the latches of the ODU.

CAUTION
When inserting, make sure that the arrow direction stenciled on the ODU is consistent with
the polarity direction of the antenna or the hybrid coupler.

4. Lock the four latches in a diagonal order.


Step 7 Connect the grounding cable and IF cable to the ODU.
Step 8 Carry out the waterproof processing for the IF interface of the ODU.
Step 9 Turn on the ODU-PWR switch on the panel of the IF board.
Step 10 When the ODU is working, observe the indicators of the IF board: ODU and LINK.
The indicators ODU and LINK should both light on as green.
Step 11 Query the current alarm of the ODU using the Web LCT or T2000 .
There should be no newly added alarms.

----End

5.9 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters


The optical connecting components are easily contaminated in the maintenance. The minute dust
particles that can be seen only in the microscope can also affect the quality of optical signals. In
this case, it downgrades the system performance. Hence, clean the fiber connectors or adapters
that are terminated in a timely manner.

5.9.1 Cleaning Fiber Connectors Using Cartridge Cleaners


When there are special cartridge cleaners (such as the CLETOP cassette cleaner), use them for
cleaning the fiber connectors.

Prerequisite
l Disconnect both ends of the fiber. Make sure that there is no laser light on the fiber
connector.
l Inspect the fiber connector with a fiber microscope to make sure that the fiber connector
is contaminated.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


Cartridge cleaner

5-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Press down and hold the lever, and the shutter slides back and exposes a new cleaning area.

Figure 5-31 CLETOP cassette cleaner

Step 2 Position the fiber tip slightly against the cleaning area and drag the fiber tip slightly in the
downward direction.

Figure 5-32 Dragging the fiber tip slightly on one cleaning area

Step 3 Repeat the same in the other cleaning area in the same direction as Step 2.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-35


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Figure 5-33 Dragging the fiber tip slightly on the other cleaning area

Step 4 Release the lever to close the cleaning area.

----End

5.9.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue


When there is no cartridge cleaners, use the lens tissue for cleaning fiber connectors.

Prerequisite
l Disconnect both ends of the fiber to be inspected. Make sure there is no laser light present
on the fiber connector.
l Inspect the fiber connector with a fiber microscope to make sure that the fiber connector
is contaminated.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


l Clean solvent
l Non-woven lens tissue
l Special compressed gas
NOTE

l Using the isoamylol as the clean solvent is recommended, and the propyl can also be used. Do not use alcohol
or formalin.
l The fiber cleaning tissue or lint-free wipes can replace the non-woven lens tissue.

l The special cleaning roll can replace the special compressed gas.

5-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide 5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Place a small amount of cleaning solvent on the lens tissue.

Step 2 Drag the fiber tip slightly on the lens tissue.

Figure 5-34 Cleaning the fiber with the lens tissue

Step 3 Repeat step 2 several times on the areas of the lens tissue that have not been used.

Step 4 Using compressed gas, blow off the fiber tip.


When using compressed gas:
l First spray it into the air as the initial spray of condensation can contain some sediment.
l Keep the injector nozzle as close as possible to the connector surface without touching it.

----End

5.9.3 Cleaning Fiber Adapters Using Optical Cleaning Sticks


Clean fiber adapters with optical cleaning sticks. This part describes the method of cleaning fiber
adapters on the optical interface board. The method of cleaning fiber adapters on the optical
attenuators and flanges is the same.

Prerequisite
l Before you clean the fiber adapter, make sure that you remove the optical fiber and shut
down the laser. For details about how to shut down a laser, refer to 5.6 Setting the State
of the Laser.
l Inspect the fiber adapter with a fiber microscope to make sure that the fiber adapter is
contaminated.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-37


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
5 Common Maintenance Operation Guide IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


l Optical cleaning sticks
l Clean solvent
l Special compressed gas
NOTE

l For the SC and FC optical interface, use the cleaning stick with a diameter of 2.5 mm, for the LC optical
interface, use the cleaning stick with a diameter of 1.25 mm.
l The medical cotton or long fiber cotton can replace the optical cleaning stick.
l Using the isoamylol as the clean solvent is preferred, and the propyl can also be used. Do not use alcohol
or formalin.
l The special cleaning roll can replace the special compressed gas.

Procedure
Step 1 Place a small amount of cleaning solvent on the optical cleaning stick.
Step 2 Hold the stick straight out from the adapter and turn the stick clockwise four to five times.
Ensure that there is direct contact between the stick tip and fiber tip so that the solvent can clean
the adapter tip.
Step 3 Using compressed gas, blow off the fiber tip.
When using compressed gas:
l First spray it into the air as the initial spray of condensation can contain some sediment.
l Keep the injector nozzle as close as possible to the connector surface without touching it.

----End

5-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

A Alarm Reference

A.1 Alarm List


The following table lists all the possible alarms generated by the OptiX RTN 600 that adopts
the IDU 610/620 in alphabetical order.

Table A-1 Alarm list


Alarm Name Description Alarm Source Board
Severit
y

A_LOC Add to bus - loss of clock Major PO1, PH1, PD1, and
PL3

APS_MANUAL_S MSP protocol stopped manually Minor SCC


TOP

ALM_GFP_dCSF GFP loss of client signal Critical EFT4 and EMS6

ALM_GFP_dLFD GFP loss of frame delineation Major EFT4 and EMS6

ALM_RTC_FAIL RTC time fail alarm Major SCC

APS_FAIL APS protection switching failed Major SCC

APS_INDI APS state indication alarm Major SCC

AU_AIS AU alarm indication Major SD1, SL1, SDE,


SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IFX, and SL4

AU_LOP AU loss of pointer Major SD1, SL1, SDE,


SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IFX, and SL4

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Alarm Name Description Alarm Source Board


Severit
y

B1_EXC Regenerator section (B1) Minor SD1, SL1, SDE,


excessive errors SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IF0A, IF0B, IFX,
and SL4

B1_SD Regenerator section (B1) signal Minor SD1, SL1, SDE,


degraded SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IF0A, IF0B, IFX,
and SL4

B2_EXC Multiplex section (B2) excessive Major SD1, SL1, SDE,


errors SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IFX, and SL4

B2_SD Multiplex section (B2) signal Minor SD1, SL1, SDE,


degraded SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IFX, and SL4

B3_EXC Higher order path (B3) excessive Major SD1, SL1, SDE,
errors SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IFX, SL4, and PL3

B3_EXC_VC3 VC-3 path(B3)excessive Major EFT4 and EMS6


errors

B3_SD Higher order path (B3) signal Minor SD1, SL1, SDE,
degraded SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IFX, SL4, and PL3

B3_SD_VC3 VC-3 path (B3) signal degraded Minor EFT4 and EMS6

BD_NOT_INSTAL Slot not installed with the Minor SCC


LED corresponding logical board

BD_STATUS Board not in position Major SD1, SL1, SDE,


SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
PO1, PH1, EFT4,
EMS6, PXC, ODU,
FAN, EOW, IF0A,
IF0B, IFX, PD1, and
SL4

BIP_EXC BIP excessive errors Minor PO1, PH1, EFT4,


EMS6, IF0A, IF0B,
IFX, and PD1

BIP_SD BIP signal degrade Minor PO1, PH1, EFT4,


EMS6, IF0A, IF0B,
and PD1

BOOTROM_BAD BOOTROM data check failure Major SCC

A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name Description Alarm Source Board


Severit
y

C2_VCAIS C2 byte mismatch Minor PL3

CONFIG_NOSUP Configuration not supported Major ODU


PORT

DBMS_ERROR Database error Major SCC

DBMS_PROTECT Database in protection mode Critical SCC


_MODE

DN_E1_AIS 2M down signal alarm indication Minor PO1, PH1, and PD1

E1_LOC Loss of E1 uplink clock Major PO1, PH1, and PD1

E1_LOS Loss of 2M line signal Minor PO1, PH1, and PD1

ESN_FAILED ESN failure Major SCC

ESN_INVALID ESN invalid Major SCC

ETH_LOS Ethernet port disconnected Critical EFT4 and EMS6

EXT_SYNC_LOS Loss of external synchronous Critical SCC


source

F1PORT_FAILED Synchronous data port failure Minor SCC

FAN_FAIL Fan failure Major FAN

FCS_ERR FCS check error Critical EFT4 and EMS6

HARD_BAD Hardware error Critical SD1, SL1, SDE,


SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
PO1, PH1, EFT4,
PXC, SCC, ODU,
EMS6, IF0A, IF0B,
IFX, PD1, and SL4

HP_CROSSTR Higher order path performance Minor SD1, SL1, SDE,


over threshold SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IFX, SL4

HP_LOM Higher order path loss of Major SD1, SL1, SDE,


multiframe SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IFX, and SL4

HP_RDI Higher order path remote defect Minor SD1, SL1, SDE,
indication SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IFX, and SL4

HP_REI Higher order path remote error Warning SD1, SL1, SDE,
indication SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IFX, and SL4

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Alarm Name Description Alarm Source Board


Severit
y

HP_SLM Higher order path signal label Minor SD1, SL1, SDE,
mismatch SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IFX, and SL4

HP_TIM Higher order path trace identifier Minor SD1, SL1, SDE,
mismatch SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IFX, and SL4

HP_UNEQ Higher order path unequipped Minor SD1, SL1, SDE,


SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IFX, and SL4

HPAD_CROSSTR Higher order path adaptation Minor PO1, PH1, and PD1
performance over threshold

HSB_INDI Microwave equipment HSB Major SCC


switching indication

HSM_INDI Microwave channels HSM Major SCC


switching indication

IF_CABLE_OPEN IF cable disconnected Major IF1A, IF1B, IF0A,


IF0B, and IFX

IF_INPWR_ABN Abnormal input IF power of the Major ODU


ODU

IF_MODE_UNSUP Preset IF working mode not Major IF1A, IF1B


PORTED supported

IN_PWR_HIGH Input power too high Critical SD1, SL1 and SL4

IN_PWR_LOW Input power too low Critical SD1, SL1, and SL4

J0_MM Trace identifier mismatch Minor SD1, SL1, SDE,


SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
and SL4

K1_K2_M Mismatched K1 and K2 Minor SCC

K2_M K2 mismatch Minor SCC

LASER_CLOSED Laser shut down Major SD1, SL1, and SL4

LASER_MOD_ER Pluggable optical module on the Major SD1, SL1, and SL4
R_EX board mismatches the optical
interface

LCAS_FOPR Failure of protocol receive Major EFT4 and EMS6

LCAS_FOPT Failure of protocol transmit Major EFT4 and EMS6

LCAS_PLCR Partial loss of capacity receive Minor EFT4 and EMS6

A-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name Description Alarm Source Board


Severit
y

LCAS_PLCT Partial loss of capacity transmit Minor EFT4 and EMS6

LCAS_TLCR Total loss of capacity receive Major EFT4 and EMS6

LCAS_TLCT Total loss of capacity receive Major EFT4 and EMS6

LCS_LIMITED Capacity of the configured Major SCC


services crosses the limit defined
in the license file

LCS_LOST License file lost Major SCC

LICENSE_ERR License file verification fails Major SCC

LCS_LOST License file lost Major SCC

LINK_ERR Data link failure Critical EMS6

LPS_UNI_BI_M Alarm of mismatch in Minor SCC


unidirectional operation and
bidirectional operation in linear
MSP

LOOP_ALM Path loopback Minor SD1, SL1, SDE,


SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
PO1, PH1,
EFT4,EMS6, ODU,
IF0A, IF0B, IFX,
PD1, and SL4

LP_CROSSTR Lower order path performance Minor PO1, PH1, and PD1
parameter over threshold

LP_R_FIFO FIFO overflow on the receiving Minor PO1, PH1, PD1, and
side of the lower order path PL3

LP_RDI Lower order path remote defect Minor PO1, PH1, IF0A,
indication IF0B, PD1, and PL3

LP_RDI_VC12 VC-12 lower order path remote Minor EFT4 and EMS6
defect indication

LP_RDI_VC3 VC-3 lower order path remote Minor EFT4 and EMS6
defect indication

LP_REI Lower order path remote error Minor PO1, PH1, IF0A,
indication IF0B, PD1, and PL3

LP_REI_VC12 VC-12 lower order path remote Minor EFT4 and EMS6
receiving failure indication

LP_REI_VC3 VC-3 lower order path remote Minor EFT4 and EMS6
receiving failure indication

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Alarm Name Description Alarm Source Board


Severit
y

LP_RFI Lower order path remote failure Minor PO1, PH1, and PD1
indication

LP_SIZE_ERR TU structure error Minor PO1, PH1, and PD1

LP_SLM Lower order path signal label Minor PO1, PH1, PD1, and
mismatch PL3

LP_SLM_VC12 VC-12 lower order path signal Minor EFT4 and EMS6
flag mismatch

LP_SLM_VC3 VC-3 lower order path signal flag Minor EFT4 and EMS6
mismatch

LP_T_FIFO FIFO overflow on the Minor PO1, PH1, PD1, and


transmission side of the lower PL3
order path

LP_TIM Lower order path trace identifier Minor PO1, PH1, PD1, and
mismatch PL3

LP_TIM_VC12 VC-12 lower order path trace Minor EFT4 and EMS6
identifier mismatch

LP_TIM_VC3 VC-3 lower order path trace Minor EFT4 and EMS6
identifier mismatch

LP_UNEQ Lower order path unequipped Minor PO1, PH1, IF0A,


IF0B, PD1, and PL3

LP_UNEQ_VC12 VC-12 lower order path signal Minor EFT4 and EMS6
unequipped

LP_UNEQ_VC3 VC-3 lower order path signal Minor EFT4 and EMS6
unequipped

LSR_NO_FITED Laser not installed Critical SD1, SL1, and SL4

LSR_WILL_DIE Laser to expire Critical SL4

LTI Loss of timing input Major SCC

MOD_TYPE_MIS Module type mismatch Critical EMS6


MATCH

MS_AIS Multiplex section alarm Major SD1, SL1, SDE,


indication SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IFX, and SL4

MS_CROSSTR Multiplex section performance Minor SD1, SL1, SDE,


over threshold SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
and SL4

A-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name Description Alarm Source Board


Severit
y

MS_RDI Multiplex section remote defect Minor SD1, SL1, SDE,


indication SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IFX, SL4

MS_REI Multiplex section remote error Warning SD1, SL1, SDE,


indication SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IFX, and SL4

MSAD_CROSSTR Multiplex section adaptation Minor SD1, SL1, SDE,


performance over threshold SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IFX, and SL4

MSSW_DIFFERE Master and slave software Major SCC


NT different alarm

MW_FECUNCOR Microwave FEC uncorrectable Minor IF1A and IF1B

MW_LIM Microwave link identifier Major IF1A, IF1B, IF0A,


mismatch IF0B, and IFX

MW_LOF Loss of microwave frame Critical IF1A, IF1B, IF0A,


IF0B, and IFX

MW_RDI Microwave link remote defect Minor IF1A, IF1B, IF0A,


indication IF0B, and IFX

NESF_LOST Loss of NE software Critical SCC

NESTATE_INSTA NE in install state Critical SCC


LL

NO_BD_SOFT Software file corrupted or Critical SD1, SL1, SDE,


missing SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
PXC, IF0A, IF0B,
IFX, SL4, and EMS6

NP1_MANUAL_S N+1 protection protocol Minor SCC


TOP manually disabled

NP1_SW_FAIL N+1 protection switching failed Major SCC

NP1_SW_INDI N+1 protection switching Major SCC


indicator

OPM_FAIL Output optical power failed Major SL4

PORT_MODULE_ Port not in position Major EMS6


OFFLINE

POWER_ALM Power module alarm Major PXC, SCC, FAN

POWER_FAIL Board power failed Major ODU

P_AIS PDH interface signal alarm Major PL3

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Alarm Name Description Alarm Source Board


Severit
y

P_LOS Signal lost over the PDH Major PL3


interface

PS Protection switch indication Major PO1, PH1, and PD1

R_F_RST Receiving FIFO reset Minor PO1, PH1, and PD1

R_LOC Receive loss of clock Critical SD1, SL1, SDE,


SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IF0A, IF0B, IFX,
and SL4

R_LOF Receive loss of frame Critical SD1, SL1, SDE,


SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IF0A, IF0B, IFX,
and SL4

R_LOS Receive loss of signal Critical SD1, SL1, SDE,


SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IFX, IF0A, IF0B,
and SL4

R_S_ERR Received signal error Critical PO1, PH1, and PD1

RADIO_MUTE Radio transmission mute Warning ODU

RADIO_RSL_HIG Radio receive signal level too Critical ODU


H high

RADIO_RSL_LO Radio receive signal level too low Critical ODU


W

RADIO_TSL_HIG Radio transmission signal level Critical ODU


H too high

RADIO_TSL_LO Radio transmission signal level Critical ODU


W too low

RELAY_ALARM Relay alarm Critical EOW

RP_LOC Loss of receiving phaselock ring Major PO1, PH1, and PD1
clock

RS_CROSSTR Regenerator section performance Minor SD1, SL1, SDE,


over threshold SLE, IF1A, IF1B,
IFX, and SL4

S1_SYN_CHANGE Reference source change in Major SCC


S1_Mode

SYN_BAD Synchronous source degraded Minor PXC

SYNC_C_LOS Synchronous source level loss Warning SCC

A-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name Description Alarm Source Board


Severit
y

T_ALOS E1 interface loss of analog signal Major PO1, PH1, and PD1

T_F_RST Transmission FIFO reset Minor PO1, PH1, and PD1

T_FIFO_E Transmission FIFO overflow Minor PO1, PH1

T_LOC Transmit loss of clock Major SD1, SL1, SDE,


SLE, and SL4

T_LOS Transmit loss of signal Major SD1, SL1, SDE,


SLE, and SL4

TEMP_ALARM Temperature over threshold Minor IF1A, IF1B, EFT4,


PXC, SCC, EMS6,
IF0A, IF0B, and IFX

TU_AIS TU alarm indication Major PO1, PH1, IF0A,


IF0B, PD1, and PL3

TU_AIS_VC12 VC-12 tributary unit alarm Major EFT4 and EMS6


indication

TU_AIS_VC3 VC-3 tributary unit alarm Major EFT4 and EMS6


indication

TU_LOP TU loss of pointer Major PO1, PH1, IF0A,


IF0B, PD1, and PL3

TU_LOP_VC12 VC-12 tributary unit loss of Major EFT4 and EMS6


pointer

TU_LOP_VC3 VC-3 tributary unit loss of pointer Major EFT4 and EMS6

UP_E1_AIS 2M up signal alarm indication Minor PO1, PH1, and PD1

VCAT_LOA Virtual concatenation delay Critical EFT4 and EMS6


crosses the threshold

VCAT_LOM_VC1 The multiframe indication of Major EFT4 and EMS6


2 members in VC-12 virtual
concatenation mismatches

VCAT_LOM_VC3 The multiframe indication of Major EFT4 and EMS6


members in VC-3 virtual
concatenation mismatches

VCAT_SQM_VC1 The serial number indication of Major EFT4 and EMS6


2 members in VC-12 virtual
concatenation mismatches

VCAT_SQM_VC3 The serial number indication of Major EFT4 and EMS6


members in VC-3 virtual
concatenation mismatches

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Alarm Name Description Alarm Source Board


Severit
y

VOLT_LOS Loss of voltage Major PXC, IF1A, IF1B,


IF0A, IF0B, and IFX

WRG_BD_TYPE Wrong board type Major SCC

WRG_DEV_TYPE Wrong device type Critical SCC

WS_LOS The 2M wayside signal is lost Major PXC


over the electrical interface

W_R_FAILURE Read and write board chip Major EMS6


register failed

XCP_INDI XCS protection switching Major SCC


indication

XPIC_LOS XPIC signal lost Critical IFX

A.2 Alarms and Corrective Procedures


This topic describes all the possible alarms of the OptiX RTN 600 and how to handle these
alarms.

A.2.1 A_LOC

Description
The A_LOC is an alarm indicating that the clock signal is lost in the adding bus.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.

A-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Name Meaning
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by path 1.

Impact on System
The board services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
The board is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Replace the faulty board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.2 APS_MANUAL_STOP

Description
The APS_MANUAL_STOP is an alarm indicating that the MSP protocol is manually disabled.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the type of a protection group.

l 0x01 indicates a linear MSP group.


l 0x02 indicates a ring MSP group.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Name Meaning
Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the protection group that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Impact on System
When the APS_MANUAL_STOP alarm arises, the MSP or the switching might fail.

Possible Causes
The MSP protocol is manually disabled.

Handling Procedure
Enable the MSP protocol.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.3 ALM_GFP_dCSF

Description
The ALM_GFP_dCSF is an alarm indicating that the generic framing procedure (GFP) customer
signal is lost. This alarm is reported if a board detects that a GFP customer signal management
frame, which indicates that the customer signal is lost, is received from the remote station.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the VCTRUNK that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by VCTRUNK 1.

A-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Impact on System
The services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
The related Ethernet port on the remote board is not well connected.

Handling Procedure
Handle the alarm occurred to the remote board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.4 ALM_GFP_dLFD

Description
The ALM_GFP_dLFD is an alarm indicating that the GFP frame is out of frame. This alarm is
reported if a board detects that the GFP frame is out of frame.

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Major Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the VCTRUNK that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by VCTRUNK 1.

Impact on System
The services are interrupted.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Possible Causes
l The source and the sink VCTRUNKs are configured with different paths or timeslots.
l Errors exist on a link or the link is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the VCTRUNK at the local end and the VCTRUNK at the remote end are
configured with the same number of physical paths and timeslots.

If ... Then ...


No, Correct the configuration.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Check whether a failure or bit errors occur in the line that services pass.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Rectify the fault.
No, Go to the next step.

Step 3 Replace the board that reports the ALM_GFP_dLFD alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.5 ALM_RTC_FAIL

Description
The ALM_RTC_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the real time clock (RTC) of the equipment
fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.
None.

A-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Impact on System
None.

Possible Causes
The RTC of the SCC board is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Reset the SCC board.

If ... Then ...


The ALM_RTC_FAIL alarm disappears after Reset the NE clock, and complete the
the resetting, alarm handling.
The alarm persists, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Replace the SCC board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.6 APS_FAIL

Description
The APS_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the MSP switching fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the type of a protection group.

l 0x01 indicates a linear MSP group.


l 0x02 indicates a ring MSP group.

Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the protection group that reports the APS_FAIL alarm. For
example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Impact on System
The services cannot be switched. If the current paths are not available, the services are
interrupted.

Possible Causes
l The parameters of the MSP are incorrectly configured.
l The parameters of the MSP are lost.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the parameters of the MSP are correctly configured.

If ... Then ...


No, Configure the MSP parameters correctly.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Check the networkwide MSP protocol, and then disable and restart the protocol manually.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the protocol is The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
restarted, is complete.
The alarm persists after the protocol is Contact the technical support engineers of
restarted, Huawei.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.7 APS_INDI

Description
The APS_INDI is an alarm indicating that MSP protection switching is detected.

A-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the type of a protection group.

l 0x01 indicates a linear MSP group.


l 0x02 indicates a ring MSP group.

Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the protection group that reports the APS_INDI alarm. For
example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Impact on System
During the MSP switching (within 50 ms), the services are interrupted. After the MSP switching
is complete, the services are restored to normal. During the MSP switching, the extra services
are interrupted.

Possible Causes
MSP switching occurs to the services.

Handling Procedure
Locate the causes of the switching and take appropriate measures.
NOTE

After the non-revertive 1+1 linear MSP switching occurs, the APS_INDI alarm is generated. When the
working path is restored to normal, the services are not automatically switched to the working path and the
APS_INDI alarm persists. In this case, you need to switch the services from the protection path to the
working path manually. After the switching is successful, the APS_INDI alarm is cleared.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.8 AU_AIS

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Description
The AU_AIS is an alarm indicating AU alarms. This alarm is reported if the AU pointers of
three consecutive frames are detected to be all "1"s.

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Major Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the AU-4 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates the alarm is reported by AU-4 path 1 in the SDH signal.

Impact on System
Services in AU-4 paths are interrupted. If the services are configured with protection, protection
switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l The AU_AIS alarm is inserted at the remote station.
l The transmit unit of the remote station is faulty.
l The receive unit of the local station is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Based on the alarm parameters, locate the AU-4 path that reports the alarm.

Step 2 Check whether the remote station has the alarms that can trigger the AU_AIS alarm.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Handle the alarms at the remote station first.
No, Go to the next step.

Step 3 Replace the line board of the remote station.

A-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the line board is The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
replaced, is complete.
The alarm persists after the line board is Go to the next step.
replaced,

Step 4 Replace the cross-connect and timing board of the remote station.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the cross- The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
connect and timing board is replaced, is complete.
The alarm persists after the cross-connect Go to the next step.
and timing board is replaced,

Step 5 Replace the board that reports the alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.9 AU_LOP

Description
The AU_LOP is an alarm indicating that AU pointer is lost. This alarm is reported if a board
detects that the AU-PTR value of eight consecutive frames is invalid or is NDF revertive.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates the alarm is reported by port 1 of the board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the AU-4 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by AU-4 path 1 in the SDH signal.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Impact on System
Services in AU-4 paths are interrupted. If the services are configured with protection, protection
switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l The transmit unit of the remote station is faulty.
l The receive unit of the local station is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Based on the alarm parameters, locate the AU-4 channel that reports the alarm.

Step 2 Replace the line board of the remote station.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the line board is The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
replaced, is complete.
The alarm persists after the line board is Go to the next step.
replaced,

Step 3 Replace the cross-connect and timing board of the remote station.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the cross- The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
connect and timing board is replaced, is complete.
The alarm persists after the cross-connect Go to the next step.
and timing board is replaced,

Step 4 Replace the board that reports the alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.10 B1_EXC

Description
The B1_EXC is an alarm indicating that the regenerator section (B1) has excessive errors. This
alarm is reported if a board detects that the B1 bit errors exceed the preset B1_EXC alarm
threshold (10-3 by default).

The IF boards that work in the PDH mode may also report this alarm. This alarm is detected by
the self-defined overhead bytes B1 in PDH microwave frames.

A-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the path ID.

Impact on System
The services on the port are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l The line performance degrades.
l The transmit unit of the remote station is faulty.
l The receive unit of the local station is faulty.

Handling Procedure
For details, refer to 4.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.11 B1_SD

Description
The B1_SD is an alarm indicating that the regenerator section (B1) signal degrades. This alarm
is reported if a board detects that the B1 bit errors exceed the preset B1_SD alarm threshold
(10-6 by default).

The IF boards that work in the PDH mode may also report this alarm. This alarm is detected by
the self-defined overhead bytes B1 in PDH microwave frames.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Minor Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the path ID.

Impact on System
The service performance on the port degrades.

Possible Causes
l The line performance degrades.
l The transmit unit of the remote station is faulty.
l The receive unit of the local station is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Refer to 4.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.12 B2_EXC

Description
The B2_EXC is an alarm indicating that the multiplex section (B2) has excessive errors. This
alarm is reported if a board detects that the B2 bit errors exceed the preset B2_EXC alarm
threshold (10-3 by default).

A-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Major Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the path ID.

Impact on System
The services on the port are interrupted. If the services are configured with protection, protection
switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l The line performance degrades.
l The transmit unit of the remote station is faulty.
l The receive unit of the local station is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Refer to 4.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.13 B2_SD

Description
The B2_SD is an alarm indicating that the regenerator section (B2) signal degrades. This alarm
is reported if a board detects that the B2 bit errors exceed the preset B2_SD alarm threshold
(10-6 by default).

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Minor Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the path ID.

Impact on System
The services on the interface degrade.

Possible Causes
l The line performance degrades.
l The transmit unit of the remote station is faulty.
l The receive unit of the local station is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Refer to 4.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.14 B3_EXC

Description
The B3_EXC is an alarm indicating that the higher order path (B3) has excessive errors. This
alarm is reported if a board detects the B3 bit errors exceed the preset B3_EXC alarm threshold
(10-3 by default).

A-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Major Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the AU-4 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by AU-4 path 1.

Impact on System
The services in the path are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l The line performance degrades.
l The transmit unit of the remote station is faulty.
l The receive unit of the local station is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Refer to 4.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.15 B3_EXC_VC3

Description
The B3_EXC_VC3 is an alarm indicating that excessive B3 bit errors exist in the VC-3 path.
This alarm is reported if a board detects that the B3 bit errors cross the preset threshold of the
B3_EXC_VC3 (10-3 by default).

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Major QoS alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by VC-3 path 1.

Impact on System
A large number of bit errors exist in the services in the VC-3 path.

Possible Causes
l The line performance degrades.
l The transmit unit of the remote station is faulty.
l The receive unit of the local station is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Refer to 4.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.16 B3_SD

Description
The B3_SD is an alarm indicating that the higher order path (B3) signal degrades. This alarm is
reported if a board detects that the B3 bit errors exceed the preset B3_SD alarm threshold
(10-6 by default).

A-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the AU-4 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by AU-4 path 1.

Impact on System
Services in the path degrade. If the services are configured with protection, protection switching
may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l The line performance degrades.
l The transmit unit of the remote station is faulty.
l The receive unit of the local station is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Refer to 4.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.17 B3_SD_VC3

Description
The B3_SD_VC3 is an alarm indicating that the B3 bits in the VC-3 path deteriorate. This alarm
is reported if a board detects that the B3 bit errors cross the preset threshold of the B3_SD_VC3
(10-6 by default).

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-27


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Minor Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by VC-3 path 1.

Impact on System
The services in this VC-3 path degrade.

Possible Causes
l The line performance degrades.
l The transmit unit of the remote station is faulty.
l The receive unit of the local station is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Refer to 4.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.18 BD_NOT_INSTALLED

Description
The BD_NOT_INSTALLED is an alarm indicating that a board is installed but the associated
logical board is not installed.

A-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Minor Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the slot ID.

Impact on System
The physical board installed in the slot fails to work.

Possible Causes
l The slot is not configured with the logical board.
l The physical board is installed into a wrong slot during the board replacement.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the physical board is installed into a wrong slot.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Install the physical board into the correct slot.
No, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Configure the logical board through the NMS.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.19 BD_STATUS

Description
The BD_STATUS is an alarm indicating that the board is not in position.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-29


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on System
The board that reports the alarm fails to work.

Possible Causes
If the board that reports the alarm is in the IDU, the possible causes are as follows:

l The board is faulty.


l The board is installed in an incorrect slot.
l The board and the backplane are not properly connected.
l The slot is faulty.

If the board that reports the alarm is in the ODU, the possible causes are as follows:

l The ODU is faulty.


l The power supply of the ODU is switched off.
l The IF cables are poorly connected.
l The IF boards are faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Handle the alarm appropriately based on the type of board that reports the alarm.

If ... Then ...


The ODU reports the alarm, Perform Step 2 to Step 6.
The IDU reports the alarm, Perform Step 7 to Step 11.

Step 2 Check whether the ODU is powered on.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Go to the next step.
No, Power on the ODU.

Step 3 Check whether the IF cables are correctly connected.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Go to the next step.

A-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

If ... Then ...


No, Connect the cables correctly.

Step 4 Replace the ODU.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the board is The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
replaced, is complete.
The alarm persists after the board is Go to the next step.
replaced

Step 5 Replace the IF cables.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the cables are The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
replaced, is complete.
The alarm persists after the cables are Go to the next step.
replaced

Step 6 Replace the IF board.


Step 7 Check whether the board that reports the alarm is installed in the correct slot.

If ... Then ...


No, Re-install the board in the correct slot.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 8 Remove and insert the board again.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the board is The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
removed and inserted, is complete.
The alarm persists after the board is Go to the next step.
removed and inserted,

Step 9 Replace the board that reports the alarm.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the board is The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
replaced, is complete.
The alarm persists after the board is Go to the next step.
replaced,

Step 10 Install the board into another slot.


If the board reports no alarm in the new slot, you can infer that the previous slot is faulty.
Step 11 Keep the board working in the new slot, and contact the technical support engineers of Huawei.

----End

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-31


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Related Information
None.

A.2.20 BIP_EXC

Description
The BIP_EXC is an alarm indicating that excessive BIP errors arise. This alarm is reported if
the BIP2 bit errors in the V5 byte exceed the preset BIP_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by path 1.

Impact on System
The services in the path are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l The line performance degrades.
l The transmit unit of the remote station is faulty.
l The receive unit of the local station is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Refer to 4.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors.
----End

Related Information
None.

A-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

A.2.21 BIP_SD

Description
The BIP_SD is an alarm indicating that the BIP signal degrades. This alarm is reported if the
BIP2 bit errors in the V5 byte exceed the preset BIP_SD alarm threshold (10-6 by default).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by path 1.

Impact on System
The services in the path degrade.

Possible Causes
l The line performance degrades.
l The transmit unit of the remote station is faulty.
l The receive unit of the local station is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Refer to 4.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.22 BOOTROM_BAD

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-33


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Description
The BOOTROM_BAD is an alarm indicating that the BOOTROM data check fails. This alarm
is reported if the system detects that the BOOTROM data is corrupted.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major alarm Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the type of BOOTROM data corruption.
l 0x01 indicates that the basic BIOS is corrupted.
l 0x02 indicates that the extended BIOS is corrupted.

Impact on System
This alarm indicates that errors arise in the system database processing. Some system
configuration data may be lost, and some query and setting commands may fail. Hence, some
system functions may fail.

l If an NE is working, the BOOTROM_BAD dose not affect the system and running services.
l If you hard reset the board in the case of a BOOTROM_BAD alarm, the board fails to load
the BIOS and thus fails to start.

Possible Causes
l The basic BIOS is corrupted
l The extended BIOS is corrupted
l The BOOTROM database is corrupted.

Handling Procedure
Replace the board that reports the alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

A.2.23 C2_VCAIS

Description
The C2_VCAIS is an alarm indicating that a mismatched signal label byte is received. This alarm
is reported if the C2 byte received by the board is "0xFF".

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor alarm Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by path 1.

Impact on System
None.

Possible Causes
The C2 byte received from the remote end is incorrectly configured.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Based on the alarm parameters, locate the VC path that reports the alarm.

Step 2 Change C2 to be Received of the remote station based on the actual situation.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.24 CONFIG_NOSUPPORT

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-35


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Description
The CONFIG_NOSUPPORT is an alarm indicating that the configuration is not supported. This
alarm is reported if the ODU detects that the configured parameters do not match those of the
ODU.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the mismatched parameter.
l 0x01: Indicates the frequency configuration error.
l 0x02: Indicates the TR spacing configuration error.
l 0x03: Indicates the transmit power configuration error.
l 0x04: Indicates the ATPC threshold configuration error.
l 0x05: Indicates the bandwidth configuration error.
l 0x06: Indicates the modulation mode configuration error.

Impact on System
The ODU fails to work normally. If the equipment is configured with 1+1 FD protection, the
main ODU generates the CONFIG_NOSUPPORT alarm. In this case, IF 1+1 protection
switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
The type of the ODU mismatches the configured parameters.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Determine the mismatched parameter according to the alarm parameters.

Step 2 Check whether the configured parameters meet the network planning requirements.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Replace the ODU with a correct one.

A-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

If ... Then ...


No, Modify the parameters.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.25 DBMS_ERROR

Description
The DBMS_ERROR is an alarm indicating that errors occur in the system database processing.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-37


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the database error.
l 0x01: Indicates that the entered parameter is illegal.
l 0x02: Indicates that no database file exists.
l 0x03: Indicates that the database storage area numbers are incorrect.
l 0x04: Indicates that a database overwriting occurs.
l 0x05: Indicates that errors occur in the header information check in the
database backup area.
l 0x06: Indicates that errors occur in the FAT table structure check in the
database storage area.
l 0x07: Indicates that errors occur in the database check in the database backup
area.
l 0x08: Indicates that restoring the database fails.
l 0x09: Indicates an invalid database ID.
l 0x0A: Indicates that the databases are different.
l 0x0B: Indicates that the data is unchecked.
l 0x0E: Indicates that the semaphore handle is invalid.
l 0x0F: Indicates that errors occur in memory applying.
l 0x10: Indicates that errors occur in memory releasing.
l 0x12: Indicates that transmitting the message packets fails.
l 0x13: Indicates that the start record is queried to be incorrect.
l 0x14: Indicates that the database is null.
l 0x15: Indicates that the mark is incorrectly set.
l 0x16: Indicates that the entered command parameters are incorrect.
l 0x17: Indicates that this is not a backup database.
l 0x18: Indicates that the database is in the protected mode.
l 0x19: Indicates that the configuration is not verified.

Parameter 2 Indicates the database memory area in which errors occur.


l 0x00: Indicates the database in the FDB0.
l 0x01: Indicates the database in the FDB1.
l 0x02: Indicates the database in the DRDB.

Parameter 3 Indicates the incorrect database ID.


l 0x00: Indicates the IDs of all the databases in the storage area.
l 0x01–0xff: Indicates the ID of a specific database.

Impact on System
When the DBMS_ERR alarm occurs, it indicates that errors occur in the system database
processing. The system configuration may be lost. As a result, the failure indication is returned
for some query and setting commands, and some system functions cannot work.

A-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l The database operation fails.
l The data in the database is corrupted.
l The SCC board is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 SCC resets.

If ... Then ...


The DBMS_ERROR alarm disappears after The fault is rectified, and the alarm
SCC resetting, handling is complete.
The DBMS_ERROR alarm persists after SCC Go to the next step.
resetting,

Step 2 Replace the boardIDU that reports the DBMS_ERROR alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.26 DBMS_PROTECT_MODE

Description
The DBMS_PROTECT_MODE is an alarm indicating that the system database is in protection
mode.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Processing alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on System
When the DBMS_PROTECT_MODE alarm arises, you can infer that errors occur in the system
database processing, which then may cause configuration data loss. As a result, some query and
setting commands may fail, and some system functions may become unavailable.

Possible Causes
The NE software is reset frequently.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-39


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Handling Procedure
Replace the board that reports the DBMS_PROTECT_MODE alarm.
----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.27 DN_E1_AIS

Description
The DN_E1_AIS is an alarm indicating that the 2-MHz downlink signal is abnormal. This alarm
is reported if the tributary board detects that the downlink E1 signal is all "1"s.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by path 1.

Impact on System
The E1 signal is unavailable.

Possible Causes
l The tributary board of the remote station transmits the E1_AIS signal.
l The receive unit of the tributary board of the local station is faulty.
l The cross-connect board of the local station is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the remote station has the UP_E1_AIS or T_ALOS alarm.

A-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

If ... Then ...


Yes, Clear the alarm.
No, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Replace the board that reports the alarm.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the board is The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
replaced, is complete.
The alarm persists after the board is Go to the next step.
replaced,

Step 3 Replace the cross-connect and timing board of the local station.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.28 E1_LOC

Description
The E1_LOC is an alarm indicating that the uplink 2-MHz clock signal is lost. This alarm is
reported if the tributary board fails to extract clock signals from the input E1 signal.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the tributary port or path that reports the alarm. For example,
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by the first port 1 or path 1 of the related
board.

Impact on System
This alarm does not affect the services.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-41


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Possible Causes
l The waveform of the input E1 signal is abnormal.
l The receive unit of the tributary board of the local station is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the remote station is faulty.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Rectify the fault.
No, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Check whether the wires of the E1 cable are correctly arranged.

If ... Then ...


No, Make a new E1 cable.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 3 Check whether there is external interference that causes abnormal E1 signal waveform.

If ... Then ...


Yes, The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling is complete.
No, Contact the technical support engineers of Huawei.

Step 4 Replace the boardthat reports the alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.29 E1_LOS

Description
The E1_LOS is an alarm indicating that the 2-MHz line signal (E1 signal) is lost. This alarm is
reported if the tributary board detects that the uplink E1 signal is all "0"s.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the

A-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,


Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by path 1.

Impact on System
E1 services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l The input E1 signal is abnormal.
l The tributary board of the local station is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the remote station is faulty.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Rectify the fault.
No, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Replace the board that reports the alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.30 ESN_FAILED

Description
The ESN_FAILED is an alarm indicating that the electronic serial number (ESN) of the
equipment fails.

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Major Equipment alarm

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-43


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the SCC board that reports the ESN_FAILED alarm.

Impact on System
None.

Possible Causes
l Reading the equipment ESN fails.
l The verification of the equipment ESN fails.

Handling Procedure
Replace the SCC board that reports the ESN_FAILED alarm.
----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.31 ESN_INVALID

Description
The ESN_INVALID is an alarm indicating that the electronic serial number (ESN) of the
equipment is invalid.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

A-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the SCC board that reports the ESN_INVALID alarm.

Impact on System
None.

Possible Causes
The ESN that is read from the SCC board is verified, but it cannot be identified.

Handling Procedure
Contact the technical support engineers of Huawei to upgrade the NE software.
----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.32 ETH_LOS

Description
The ETH_LOS is an alarm indicating that the Ethernet port is disconnected.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical alarm Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the Ethernet port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by Ethernet port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 The values are always 0x00 and 0x01, respectively.

Impact on System
The services carried over the port are interrupted.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-45


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Possible Causes
l The Ethernet cable or optical fiber connected to the port is faulty.
l The equipment connected to the port is faulty.
l The working mode of the port does not match that of the port at the remote end.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check the Ethernet cable or optical fiber connected to the port.

If ... Then ...


The Ethernet cable or optical fiber is loose Reconnect or replace the Ethernet cable or
or damaged, optical fiber.
The connector of the optical fiber is dirty, Clean the connector of the optical fiber.
The connector of the optical fiber is loose or Reconnect or replace the connector.
damaged,
The Ethernet cable or optical fiber is Go to the next step.
connected properly to the port,

Step 2 Check whether the equipment connected to the port is faulty.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Rectify the fault.
No, Go to the next step.

Step 3 Check whether the working modes of the ports at both ends match each other.

If ... Then ...


No, Reset the working modes at both ends and ensure that they match each other.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 4 Replace the board that reports the ETH_LOS alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.33 EXT_SYNC_LOS

Description
The EXT_SYNC_LOS is an alarm indicating that the external clock source is lost.

A-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Critical Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the external clock that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by external clock 1.

Impact on System
l If the clock source priority table is configured with the external and internal clock sources
only, the internal clock source is traced and the clock enters the free-run mode after the
loss of the external clock source.
l If the clock source priority table is configured with other valid clock sources, the loss of
the external clock source can trigger clock protection switching.

Possible Causes
The clock priority table has the external clock source, but the external clock source cannot be
detected or is unavailable.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the clock source device at the remote end is faulty.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Rectify the fault.
No, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Check whether the cable of the external clock source is normal.

If ... Then ...


No, Replace the cable.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 3 Replace the cross-connect and timing board that connects to the clock source.

----End

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-47


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Related Information
None.

A.2.34 F1PORT_FAILED

Description
The F1PORT_FAILED is an alarm indicating that the synchronous data port fails. This alarm
is reported if the synchronous data port–related data is configured but the SCC does not provide
a synchronous data port.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor alarm Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on System
The synchronous data port–related configuration is invalid.

Possible Causes
The portable memory card located in the SCC is configured with synchronous data port–related
data, but the SCC does not provide a synchronous data port.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the synchronous data port–related data is required.

If ... Then ...


Required, Go to the next step.
Not required, Delete the data through the NMS.

Step 2 Replace the SCC board with an SL61 of VER.C or higher.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.35 FAN_FAIL

A-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Description
The FAN_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the fan fails.

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Major Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on System
The heat dissipation is affected.

Possible Causes
l The board is faulty.
l The board and the backplane are poorly connected.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Remove and insert the fan board. Remove the dust on the fan and re-install the fan board.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the board is The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
removed and inserted, is complete.
The alarm persists after the board is Go to the next step.
removed and inserted,

Step 2 Replace the board that reports the alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.36 FCS_ERR

Description
The FCS_ERR is an alarm indicating that errors occur in the verification of the frame check
sequence (FCS). This alarm is reported if errors occur when a board performs FCS verification
for the received frames.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-49


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Critical Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by path 1.

Impact on System
When the encapsulation protocols or the encapsulation parameters at both ends of the Ethernet
service are different, the service is interrupted or bit errors arise.

Possible Causes
l The encapsulation protocols or the encapsulation parameters at both ends of the Ethernet
service are different.
l Bit errors exist in the service path.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the encapsulation protocols at both ends of the Ethernet service are the same.

If ... Then ...


No, Correct the configuration.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Check whether the encapsulation parameters at both ends of the Ethernet service are the same.

If ... Then ...


No, Correct the configuration.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 3 Check whether any bit error alarm or performance event occurs on the line boards through which
the service travels.

A-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

If ... Then ...


Yes, Handle the alarm or performance event.
No, Go to the next step.

Step 4 Replace the board on which the FCS_ERR alarm occurs.

If ... Then ...


The FCS_ERR alarm disappears after the The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
board is replaced, is complete.
The FCS_ERR alarm persists after the Go to the next step.
board is replaced,

Step 5 Replace the cross-connect board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.37 HARD_BAD

Description
The HARD_BAD is an alarm indicating hardware errors.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-51


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the cause of the fault.
l 0x01: Indicates that the power module is working abnormally.
l 0x02: Indicates that the board is improperly installed.
l 0x03: Indicates that the 38-MHz system clock 1 is abnormal.
l 0x04: Indicates that the 38-MHz system clock 2 is abnormal.
l 0x05: Indicates that the 2-MHz clock source is abnormal.
l 0x06: Indicates that the digital phase-locked loop is abnormal.
l 0x07: Indicates that the 38-MHz service clock is lost.
l 0x08: Indicates that the bus is abnormal.
l 0x09: Indicates that the TPS protection board is abnormal.
l 0x0A: Indicates that the primary crystal oscillator stops oscillating.
l 0x0B: Indicates the frequency offset of the primary crystal oscillator is
excessive.
l 0x0C: Indicates that the secondary crystal oscillator stops oscillating.
l 0x0D: Indicates that the processor (CPU/DSP/coprocessor) is faulty.
l 0x0E: Indicates that the storage components are faulty.
l 0x0F: Indicates that the programmable logic device is faulty.
l 0x10: Indicates that the SDH components are faulty.
l 0x11: Indicates that the data communication components are faulty.
l 0x12: Indicates that the clock components are faulty.
l 0x13: Indicates that the interface components are faulty.
l 0x14: Indicates that the power components are faulty.
l 0x15: Indicates other faults.
l 0x16: Indicates that the analog phase-locked loop is abnormal.
l 0x17: Indicates that the 32-MHz clock is unavailable.
l 0x18: Indicates that the 66-MHz clock is unavailable.
l 0x19: Indicates that the 25-MHz clock is unavailable.

Impact on System
The board that reports the alarm fails to work.

Possible Causes
l The board is faulty.
l The board and the backplane are not properly connected.
l The slot is faulty.

A-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Remove and insert the board again.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the board is The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
removed and inserted, is complete.
The alarm persists after the board is Go to the next step.
removed and inserted,

Step 2 Replace the board that reports the alarm.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the board is The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
replaced, is complete.
The alarm persists after the board is Go to the next step.
replaced,

Step 3 Install the board that reports the alarm into another slot.
If the board reports no alarm in the new slot, you can infer that the previous slot is faulty.
Step 4 Keep the board in the new slot, and contact the technical support engineers of Huawei for
rectifying the fault.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.38 HP_CROSSTR

Description
The HP_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that a performance indicator of the higher order path
crosses the related threshold. This alarm is reported if a board detects that a bit error performance
indicator of the higher order path crosses the preset threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-53


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm.
Parameters 4–5 l The two most significant bits of Parameter 4 indicate the performance
monitoring period. When the value of the two most significant is "01", the
monitoring period is 15 minutes. When the value of the two most
significant is "02", the monitoring period is 24 hours.
l The six least significant bits of Parameter 4 together with Parameter 5
indicate the performance event ID.

Impact on System
The services contain a large amount of bit errors, and the services may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
A bit error performance indicator of the higher order path crosses the preset threshold.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check the threshold crossing records of higher order path bit error performance events to
determine the performance event that crosses the preset threshold.
Step 2 Handle the performance event accordingly.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.39 HP_LOM

Description
The HP_LOM is an alarm indicating that the multiframe is lost in the higher order path. This
alarm is reported if a board detects that the H4 byte mismatches the expected multiframe
sequence.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the

A-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,


Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the AU-4 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by AU-4 path 1 in the SDH signal.

Impact on System
The services in the path are interrupted. If the services are configured with protection, protection
switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l The transmit unit of the remote station is faulty.
l The receive unit of the local station is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Replace the line board of the remote station.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the board is The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
replaced, is complete.
The alarm persists after the board is Go to the next step.
replaced,

Step 2 Replace the cross-connect and timing board of the remote station.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the board is The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
replaced, is complete.
The alarm persists after the board is Go to the next step.
replaced,

Step 3 Replace the board that reports the alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.40 HP_RDI

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-55


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Description
The HP_RDI is an alarm indicating that signal reception fails at the remote end of the higher
order path. This alarm is reported if a board detects that bit 5 of the G1 byte is "1".

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the AU-4 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by AU-4 path 1 in the SDH signal.

Impact on System
The local station is not affected. Signal reception at the remote station, however, is interrupted.

Possible Causes
The local station receives a message from the remote station, and the message indicates that
signal reception fails at the remote end of the higher order path.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Based on the alarm parameters, locate the AU-4 path that reports the alarm.

Step 2 Clear the alarm in the AU-4 path of the remote station.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.41 HP_REI

A-56 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Description
The HP_REI is an alarm indicating that an error is detected in the remote higher order path. This
alarm is reported if the board detects that the values of bit 1 through bit 4 of the G1 byte range
from "1" to "8".

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Warning Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the AU-4 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by AU-4 path 1 in the SDH signal.

Impact on System
The local station is not affected. The remote station, however, receives bit errors.

Possible Causes
The local station receives a message from the remote station, and the message indicates bit errors
over the remote higher order path.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Based on the alarm parameters, locate the AU-4 path that reports the alarm.

Step 2 Handle the HP_BBE performance event in the AU-4 path of the remote station.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.42 HP_SLM

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-57


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Description
The HP_SLM is an alarm indicating that a mismatched higher order path signal label is detected.
This alarm is reported if a board detects a mismatched C2 byte.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the AU-4 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by AU-4 path 1 in the SDH signal.

Impact on System
None.

Possible Causes
l The C2 byte to be received at the local station mismatches the C2 byte transmitted by the
remote station.
l The data configuration is wrong.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Based on the alarm parameters, locate the AU-4 path that reports the alarm.
Step 2 If the port that reports the alarm is the SDH port used to interconnect ATM/Ethernet equipment,
configure the services to be VC-4 pass-through services.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the configurations The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
are modified, is complete.
The alarm persists after the configurations are Go to the next step.
modified

Step 3 Ensure that the service types at the local and remote stations of the AU-4 path are identical.

----End

A-58 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.2.43 HP_TIM

Description
The HP_TIM is an alarm indicating that a mismatched higher order path trace identifier is
detected. This alarm is reported if the board detects a mismatched J1 byte.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the AU-4 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by AU-4 path 1 in the SDH signal.

Impact on System
If the services are configured with protection and this alarm is the triggering condition, protection
switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l The J1 byte to be received at the local station is different from the J1 byte transmitted from
the remote station.
l Data configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Based on the alarm parameters, locate the AU-4 path that reports the alarm.

Step 2 If the port that reports the alarm is the SDH port used to interconnect ATM/Ethernet equipment,
configure the services to be VC-4 pass-through services.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-59


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the configurations The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
are modified, is complete.
The alarm persists after the configurations are Go to the next step.
modified,

Step 3 Set the J1 byte to be received at the local station to the disable mode. Alternatively, set the J1
byte to be received at the local station to be the same as that transmitted from the remote station.
Step 4 Check whether the cross-connections of the intermediate nodes through which the service travels
are correctly configured. If not, correct the cross-connection configuration.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.44 HP_UNEQ

Description
The HP_UNEQ is an alarm indicating that the higher order path is unequipped. This alarm is
reported if a board detects that the C2 byte is "0".

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the AU-4 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by AU-4 path 1 in the SDH signal.

Impact on System
Services in the AU-4 path are unavailable. If the services are configured with protection and this
alarm is the triggering condition, protection switching may be triggered.

A-60 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
The line port of the local station is configured with services, but the line port of the remote station
is not.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Based on the alarm parameters, locate the AU-4 path that reports the alarm.

Step 2 Configure line services for the remote station.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.45 HPAD_CROSSTR

Description
The HPAD_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that a higher order path adaptation performance
indicator crosses the threshold. This alarm is reported if a board detects that a TU pointer
adaptation performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm.
Parameters 4–5 l The higher two bits of Parameter 4 indicate the performance monitoring
period. When the value of the two most significant bits is "01", the
monitoring period is 15 minutes. When the value of the two most
significant bits is "02", the monitoring period is 24 hours.
l The six least significant bits of Parameter 4 together with Parameter 5
indicate the ID of a performance event.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-61


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Impact on System
Bit errors may occur to the services.

Possible Causes
A TU pointer adaptation performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check the threshold crossing records of the TU pointer adaptation performance events, and
locate the performance event that crosses the preset threshold.

Step 2 Handle the performance event that crosses the threshold.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.46 HSB_INDI

Description
The HSB_INDI is an alarm indicating that the microwave equipment is switched over.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the protection group.
Parameter 2 Indicates the slot where the working board is installed.

Impact on System
The services are interrupted during the protection switching and return to normal after the
switching is complete.

A-62 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
1+1 HSB protection switching occurs.

Handling Procedure
Locate the cause of switching, and take appropriate measures.
----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.47 HSM_INDI

Description
The HSM_INDI is an alarm indicating that the microwave channel is switched over.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the protection group.
Parameter 2 Indicates the slot where the working board is installed.

Impact on System
Bit errors are not generated during channel switching. This alarm has no impact on the services.

Possible Causes
1+1 FD/SD protection switching occurs.

Handling Procedure
Locate the cause of switching, and take appropriate measures.
----End

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-63


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Related Information
None.

A.2.48 IF_CABLE_OPEN

Description
The IF_CABLE_OPEN is an alarm indicating that the IF cable is disconnected.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major alarm Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the IF port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01 indicates
that the alarm is reported by IF port 1 of the related board.

Impact on System
The services carried over the IF port are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l The IF cable is loose or faulty.
l The IF port on the IF board is faulty.
l The power module of the ODU is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the connector of the IF cable is loose or whether the connector is not properly
made.

If ... Then ...


The connector is loose, Tighten the connector.
The connector is not properly made, Make a new connector.
None of the above, Go to the next step.

A-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Step 2 Check whether the jacket of the IF cable is damaged.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Use a multimeter to test whether the IF cable conducts electricity well, and replace the
cable if it fails to conduct electricity.
No, Go to the next step.

Step 3 Replace the IF board.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the IF board is The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
replaced, is complete.
The alarm persists after IF board is Go to the next step.
replaced,

Step 4 Replace the ODU.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.49 IF_INPWR_ABN

Description
The IF_INPWR_ABN is an alarm indicating that the input IF power of the ODU is abnormal.

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Major Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 l 0x01 indicates that the input power is too high.
l 0x02 indicates that the input power is too low.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-65


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Impact on System
The services on the ODU are interrupted. If 1+1 protection is configured, 1+1 HSB switching
may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l There is an inloop operation on the IF port.
l The IF board is faulty.
l The IF cables are faulty.
l The ODU is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether there is an inloop operation on the IF port.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Cancel the loopback operation.
No, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Check whether the IF cables are soggy, broken, or pressed.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Replace the IF cables.
No, Go to the next step.

Step 3 Check whether the cable connector workmanship meets the requirement.

If ... Then ...


No, Make a new connector.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 4 Replace the IF board connecting with the ODU that reports the alarm.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the boardis The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
replaced, is complete.
The alarm persists after the board is Go to the next step.
replaced,

Step 5 Replace the ODU that reports the alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A-66 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

A.2.50 IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED

Description
The IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED is an alarm indicating that the configured IF working mode
is not supported. This alarm is reported if the board is not loaded with the FPGA file that supports
the configured IF working mode.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major alarm Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the IF port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01 indicates
that the alarm is reported by IF port 1 of the related board.

Impact on System
The services carried over the IF port are interrupted.

Possible Causes
The board is not loaded with the FPGA file that supports the configured IF working mode.

Handling Procedure
Contact the technical support engineers of Huawei to upgrade the board software and the FPGA
file.
----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.51 IN_PWR_HIGH

Description
The IN_PWR_HIGH is an alarm indicating that the input power is too high.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-67


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the optical interface that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by optical interface 1 of the board.

Impact on System
Bit errors occur to the services of the optical interface.

Possible Causes
l The transmit optical power of the remote station is too high.
l The type of the optical module is incorrect.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Based on the alarm parameters, locate the optical interface that reports the alarm.
Step 2 Based on the transmission distance, check whether the type of the SFP optical modules of the
receive and transmit ends is correct.

If ... Then ...


No, Replace the optical modules.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 3 Query the performance events of the transmit optical power at the remote station.

If ... Then ...


The transmit optical power does not meet the requirement, Replace the optical modules.
The transmit optical power meets the requirement, Go to the next step.

Step 4 Add a proper optical attenuator to reduce the receive optical power.

----End

Related Information
None.

A-68 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

A.2.52 IN_PWR_LOW

Description
The IN_PWR_LOW is an alarm indicating that the input power is too low.

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Critical Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the optical interface that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by optical interface 1 of the related board.

Impact on System
Bit errors may occur to the services on the optical interface.

Possible Causes
l The transmit optical power of the remote station is too low.
l The fiber performance degrades.
l The type of the optical module is incorrect.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Based on the alarm parameters, locate the optical interface that reports the alarm.

Step 2 Based on the transmission distance, check whether the type of the SFP optical modules of the
receive and transmit ends is correct .

If ... Then ...


NO, Replace the optical modules.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 3 Query the performance events of the transmit optical power at the remote station.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-69


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

If ... Then ...


The transmit optical power does not meet the requirement, Replace the optical modules.
The transmit optical power meets the requirement, Go to the next step.

Step 4 Clean the optical fiber connector.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the connector is The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
cleaned, is complete.
The alarm persists after the connector is Go to the next step.
cleaned,

Step 5 Check whether the fiber is broken or pressed.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Replace the fiber.
No, Go to the next step.

Step 6 Add a proper optical amplifier to increase the receive optical power.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.53 J0_MM

Description
The J0_MM is an alarm indicating that a mismatched trace identifier is detected. This alarm is
reported if a board detects a mismatched J0 byte.

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

A-70 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the path ID.

Impact on System
None.

Possible Causes
The J0 byte to be received by the local station mismatches the J0 byte transmitted by the remote
station.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Based on the alarm parameters, locate the line port that reports the alarm.

Step 2 Set the J0 byte to be received at the local station to the disable mode.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.54 K1_K2_M

Description
The K1_K2_M is an alarm indicating that the K1 and K2 bytes are mismatched. This alarm is
reported if a board detects that the transmitted K1 byte (bits 5–8) contains a path ID different
from that contained in the received K2 byte.

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-71


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the type of a protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates a linear
MSP group.
Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the protection group that reports the K1_K2_M alarm. For
example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Impact on System
The MSP switching may be abnormal or even fail.

Possible Causes
l The switching modes at both ends are single-ended switching and dual-ended switching,
respectively.
l The equipment is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the services are correctly configured.

If ... Then ...


No, Correct the configuration.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Check whether the fiber connections are correct.

If ... Then ...


No, Correct the fiber connections.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 3 Replace the line board at the remote station.

If ... Then ...


The K1_K2_M alarm disappears after the The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
board is replaced is complete.
The K1_K2_M alarm persists, Go to the next step.

Step 4 Replace the board that reports the K1_K2_M alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.55 K2_M

A-72 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Description
The K2_M is an alarm indicating that a mismatched K2 byte is detected. This alarm is reported
if a board detects that the received K2 byte (bit 5) contains a protection mode different from that
of the local station.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the type of a protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates a linear
MSP group.
Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the protection group that reports the K2_M alarm. For
example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Impact on System
The MSP switching may be abnormal or even fail.

Possible Causes
l Two NEs on a linear MS are configured with different MSP modes, such as 1+1 and 1:N.
l When the MSP switching occurs, the MSP protocol at the remote station is disabled.
l The equipment is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the two NEs on a linear MS are configured with the same MSP mode.

If ... Then ...


No, Correct the configuration.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Check whether the fiber connections are correct.

If ... Then ...


No, Correct the fiber connections.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-73


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

If ... Then ...


Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 3 Replace the line board at the remote station.

If ... Then ...


The K2_M alarm disappears after the board The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
is replaced, is complete.
The K2_M alarm persists, Go to the next step.

Step 4 Replace the board that reports the K2_M alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.56 LASER_CLOSED

Description
The LASER_CLOSED is an alarm indicating that the laser is closed.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the optical interface that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by optical interface 1 of the related board.

Impact on System
The optical interface fails to carry services.

Possible Causes
The laser is shut down at the local station.

A-74 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Based on the alarm parameters, locate the optical interface that reports the alarm.
Step 2 Find the reason for shutting down the laser, and turn it on promptly.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.57 LASER_MOD_ERR_EX

Description
The LASER_MOD_ERR_EX is an alarm indicating that the pluggable optical module on the
board mismatches the optical interface.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the optical interface that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by optical interface 1 of the board.

Impact on System
The services on the optical interface are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l The rate of the optical module does not match that of the optical interface.
l The optical module is faulty.
l The board is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the rate of the optical module and that of the optical interface match each other.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-75


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

If ... Then ...


No, Replace the optical module with an appropriate one.
Yes, Replace the optical module with a new one of the same type.

Step 2 Check whether the alarm is cleared.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the optical The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
module is replaced, is complete.
The alarm persists after the optical module Go to the next step.
is replaced,

Step 3 Replace the board that reports the alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.58 LCAS_FOPR

Description
The LCAS_FOPR is an alarm indicating that the link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
protocol in the receive direction fails. This alarm is reported if the receive unit of the LCAS
module of a board detects an abnormal state in which the LCAS might fail to negotiate or cannot
negotiate correctly.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the VCTRUNK that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by VCTRUNK 1.

A-76 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Impact on System
The Ethernet service is abnormal.

Possible Causes
l The downlink virtual concatenation group (VCG) receives repeated sequence numbers due
to incorrect configuration or bit errors on the link.
l The LCAS function of the remote VCG is disabled.
l The downlink VCG receives the FIXED and other LCAS control bytes simultaneously
owing to incorrect configuration or bit errors on the link.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the LCAS enable state and the LCAS parameters are the same at both ends of
the link.

If ... Then ...


No, Set the LCAS protocol properly at both ends of the link.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Check whether the configurations of the local and remote stations are correct. That is, check
whether an VCG of the local station is connected to multiple VCGs of the remote station.

If ... Then ...


No, Correct the configuration.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 3 Check whether a fault such as failure or bit errors occurs on the service link.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Rectify the fault.
No, Go to the next step.

Step 4 Disable the LCAS protocol at both the stations, and then restart the protocol.

Step 5 Replace the board that reports the LCAS_FOPR alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.59 LCAS_FOPT

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-77


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Description
The LCAS_FOPT is an alarm indicating that the LCAS protocol in the transmit direction fails.
This alarm is reported if the transmit unit of the LCAS module of a board detects an abnormal
state in which the LCAS might fail to negotiate or cannot negotiate correctly.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the VCTRUNK that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by VCTRUNK 1.

Impact on System
The Ethernet service is abnormal.

Possible Causes
l The LCAS protocol configuration is incorrect.
l The link is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the LCAS enable state and the LCAS parameters are the same at both ends of
the link.

If ... Then ...


No, Set the LCAS protocol properly at both ends of the link.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Check whether a fault such as failure or bit errors occurs on the service link.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Rectify the fault.
No, Go to the next step.

A-78 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Step 3 Disable the LCAS protocol at both ends of the link, and then restart the protocol.

If ... Then ...


The LCAS_FOPT alarm disappears after the The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
protocol is restarted, is complete.
The LCAS_FOPT alarm persists after the Go to the next step.
protocol is restarted,

Step 4 Replace the board that reports the LCAS_FOPT alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.60 LCAS_PLCR

Description
The LCAS_PLCR is an alarm indicating that a part of the LCAS bandwidth in the receive
direction is lost. This alarm is reported if a board detects that the number of paths that carry the
overloads in the receive direction of the VCTRUNK with the LCAS enabled is less than the
preset number but is not zero.

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Minor Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the VCTRUNK that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by VCTRUNK 1.

Impact on System
The available Ethernet service bandwidth is smaller than the configured bandwidth.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-79


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Possible Causes
l The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote
station is different from that at the local station.
l Some paths in the transmit direction of the remote station are faulty.
l Some paths in the receive direction of the local station are faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the VCTRUNKs at the transmit and the receive directions at the local station are
configured with the same number of physical paths and timeslots.

If ... Then ...


No, Correct the configuration.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Check whether any path alarm exists in the transmit direction of the remote station.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Handle the alarms.
No, Go to the next step.

Step 3 Replace the board that reports the LCAS_PLCR alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.61 LCAS_PLCT

Description
The LCAS_PLCT is an alarm indicating that part of the LCAS bandwidth in the transmit
direction is lost. This alarm is reported if a board detects that the number of paths that carry the
overloads in the transmit direction of the VCTRUNK with the LCAS enabled is less than the
preset number but is not zero.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,

A-80 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the VCTRUNK that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by VCTRUNK 1.

Impact on System
The available Ethernet service bandwidth is smaller than the configured bandwidth.

Possible Causes
l The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote
station is different from that at the local station.
l Some paths in the receive direction of the remote station are faulty.
l Some paths in the transmit direction of the local station are faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the VCTRUNKs in the transmit direction of the local station and the receive
direction of the remote station are configured with the same number of physical paths and
timeslots.

If ... Then ...


No, Correct the configuration.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Check whether any path alarm exists in the receive direction of the remote station.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Handle the alarms.
No, Go to the next step.

Step 3 Replace the board that reports the LCAS_PLCT alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.62 LCAS_TLCR

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-81


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Description
The LCAS_TLCR is an alarm indicating that all the LCAS bandwidth in the receive direction
is lost. This alarm is reported if no path in the receive direction of the VCTRUNK with LCAS
enabled carries the overload but paths are configured to carry the overload.

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Major Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the VCTRUNK that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by VCTRUNK 1.

Impact on System
The Ethernet service is interrupted.

Possible Causes
l The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote
station is different from that at the local station.
l The paths in the transmit direction of the remote station are faulty.
l The paths in the receive direction of the local station are faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the VCTRUNKs at the transmit and the receive directions at the local station are
configured with the same number of physical paths and timeslots.

If ... Then ...


No, Correct the configuration.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Check whether any path alarm exists in the transmit direction of the remote station.

A-82 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

If ... Then ...


Yes, Handle the alarms.
No, Go to the next step.

Step 3 Replace the board that reports the LCAS_TLCR alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.63 LCAS_TLCT

Description
The LCAS_TLCT is an alarm indicating that all the LCAS bandwidth in the transmit direction
is lost. This alarm is reported if no path in the transmit direction of the VCTRUNK with LCAS
enabled carries the overload but paths are configured to carry the overload.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the VCTRUNK that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by VCTRUNK 1.

Impact on System
The Ethernet service is interrupted.

Possible Causes
l The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote
station is different from that at the local station.
l The paths in the transmit direction of the remote station are faulty.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-83


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

l The paths in the receive direction of the local station are faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the VCTRUNKs at the transmit and the receive directions at the local station are
configured with the same number of physical paths and timeslots.

If ... Then ...


No, Correct the configuration.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Check whether any path alarm exists in the transmit direction of the remote station.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Handle the alarms.
No, Go to the next step.

Step 3 Replace the board that reports the LCAS_TLCT alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.64 LCS_LIMITED

Description
The LCS_LIMITED is an alarm indicating that the capacity of the services configured for an
NE crosses the limit defined in the license file.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major alarm Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on System
Changing the capacity of the microwave services through an NE does not take effect.

Possible Causes
The capacity of the configured services crosses the limit defined in the license file.

A-84 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the capacity of the microwave services is changed as required.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Go to the next step.
No, Delete the unauthorized microwave cross-connections.

Step 2 Check whether the service capacity defined in the license file of the NE is in agreement with the
latest authorization terms.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Go to the next step.
No, Contact the technical support engineers of Huawei to obtain the latest license file.

Step 3 Contact the local Huawei office to apply for the authorization of greater service capability.

----End

Related Information
The microwave service capacity of an NE is calculated based on the cross-connections on the
IF board.

A.2.65 LICENSE_LOST

Description
The LICENSE_LOST is an alarm indicating that the license file is not detected.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major alarm Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on System
If no microwave service is configured, the microwave services with a default capacity of 4xE1
are configured. If microwave services are configured, there is no impact on the system except
that an alarm is reported.

Possible Causes
The license file is lost or not loaded.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-85


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Handling Procedure
Contact the technical support engineers of Huawei to reload the associated license file.
----End

Related Information
The microwave service capacity of an NE is calculated based on the cross-connections on the
IF board.

A.2.66 LICENSE_ERR

Description
The LICENSE_ERR is an alarm indicating that license verification of a NE fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major alarm Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the cause of verification failure.

l 0x01: Indicates that the license file is illegal.


l 0x02: Indicates that the license file is incorrect in file format.
l 0x03: Indicates that the characteristic segment (signature) verification fails.
l 0x04: Indicates that the equipment serial number specified in the characteristic
segment does not match the equipment.
l 0x05: Indicates that the trial usage of the characteristic segment expires.
l 0x06: Indicates that the characteristic segment is incorrect in format.
l 0x07: Indicates that the characteristic segment expires.

Impact on System
If no microwave service is configured, the microwave services with a default capacity of 4xE1
are configured. If microwave services are configured, there is no impact on the system except
that an alarm is reported.

A-86 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
The verification of the license file fails.

Handling Procedure
Contact the technical support engineers of Huawei to reload the associated license file.

----End

Related Information
The microwave service capacity of an NE is calculated based on the cross-connections on the
IF board.

A.2.67 LINK_ERR

Description
The LINK_ERR is an alarm indicating that the data link fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical alarm Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the optical interface. For example, 0x01 indicates that the
alarm is reported by optical interface 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. 0x00 0x01 indicates that
the alarm is reported by path 1.

Impact on System
The services carried over the path are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l The optical fiber connected to the Ethernet optical interface is faulty.
l The working modes of the ports at both ends do not match each other.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-87


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

l The equipment at the local end or the remote end is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the optical fiber connected to the Ethernet optical interface is faulty.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Replace the optical fiber.
No, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Check whether the working modes of the ports at both ends match each other.

If ... Then ...


No, Adjust the working modes of the ports and ensure that they match each other.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 3 Use an optical fiber to conduct a loopback test over the port that reports the alarm.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears, Replace the Ethernet board at the remote end.
The alarm persists, Replace the Ethernet board at the local end.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.68 LOOP_ALM

Description
The LOOP_ALM is an alarm indicating that a path loopback arises.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

A-88 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm.
Parameter 4 Indicates the type of loopback.
l 0x00: Indicates optical/electrical port inloop.
l 0x01: Indicates optical/electrical port outloop.
l 0x02: Indicates path inloop.
l 0x03: Indicates path outloop.
l 0x04: Indicates loopback at the user side.
l 0x05: Indicates loopback at the combination wave side.
l 0x06: Indicates SPI inloop.
l 0x07: Indicates SPI outloop.
l 0x08: Indicates ATM layer inloop.
l 0x09: Indicates ATM layer outloop.
l 0x0A: Indicates PHY layer inloop.
l 0x0B: Indicates PHY layer outloop.
l 0x0C: Indicates MAC layer inloop.
l 0x0D: Indicates MAC layer outloop.
l 0x0E: Indicates VC-4 timeslot inloop.
l 0x0F: Indicates VC-4 timeslot outloop.
l 0x10: Indicates VC-3 timeslot inloop.
l 0x11: Indicates VC-3 timeslot outloop.
l 0x12: Indicates VC-12 timeslot inloop.
l 0x13: Indicates VC-12 timeslot outloop.
l 0x14: Indicates IF outloop.
l 0x15: Indicates IF inloop.
l 0x16: Indicates RF inloop.
l 0xFF: Indicates one of the above loopback modes.

Impact on System
The loopback port or path fails to carry services.

Possible Causes
Loopback is performed at the local station.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-89


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Based on the alarm parameters, determine the type of loopback.

Step 2 Find out the cause of loopback, and cancel the loopback.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.69 LPS_UNI_BI_M

Description
The LPS_UNI_BI_M is an alarm indicating that switching modes (single-ended or dual-ended)
at both ends of the linear MSP do not match each other.

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Minor Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the protection group that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Impact on System
The system performs protection switching in single-ended mode.

Possible Causes
The LPS_UNI_BI_M alarm is generated only when the following conditions are met:
l The switching modes at the local and remote stations are different.
l The last three bits of the K2 byte are set to the indicated mode.
l The type of the protocol is set to the restructure protocol.

A-90 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Handling Procedure
Change the MSP switching modes at both ends, and ensure that they are the same.
----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.70 LP_CROSSTR

Description
The LP_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that a lower order path performance indicator crosses
the related threshold. This alarm is reported if a board detects that a lower order path bit error
performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm.
Parameter 4–5 l The two most significant bits of Parameter 4 indicate the performance
monitoring period. When the value of the two most significant bits is "01",
the monitoring period is 15 minutes. When the value of the two most
significant bits is "02", the monitoring period is 24 hours.
l The six least significant bits of Parameter 4 together with Parameter 5
indicate the performance event ID.

Impact on System
The services contain a large amount of bit errors and the services may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
Lower order path bit error performance events exceed the preset threshold.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-91


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check the threshold crossing records of lower order path bit error performance events to
determine the performance event that crosses the preset threshold.

Step 2 Handle the performance event that crosses the threshold.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.71 LP_R_FIFO

Description
The LP_R_FIFO is an alarm indicating that the FIFO overflows on the receive side of a lower
order path.

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Minor Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by path 1.

Impact on System
Bit errors occur to the services.

Possible Causes
l The board is faulty.
l The clock at the local station and that at the remote station are asynchronous.

A-92 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether there are TU pointer adjustment performance events at the local and remote
stations.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Handle the performance events.
No, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Replace the board that reports the alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.72 LP_RDI

Description
The LP_RDI is an alarm indicating that the remote end fails to receive signals over the lower-
order path. This alarm is reported if the board detects that bit 8 of the V5 byte (indicating E1
interface board) is 1 or bit 5 of the G1 byte (indicating E3/T3 interface board) is 1.

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by path 1.

Impact on System
The local station is not affected, but the service reception at the remote station is interrupted.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-93


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Possible Causes
The local station receives a message from the remote station, and the message says that signal
reception in the lower-order path fails.

Handling Procedure
Handle the alarm about the lower order path of the remote station.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.73 LP_RDI_VC12

Description
The LP_RDI_VC12 is an alarm indicating that data reception fails at the remote end of VC-12
lower order path. This alarm is reported if a board detects that bit 8 of the V5 byte is "1".

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by VC-12 path 1.

Impact on System
The local station is not affected. Data reception at the remote station, however, is interrupted.

Possible Causes
The local station receives a message from the remote station, and the message says that data
reception fails at the remote end of a lower order path.

A-94 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Handling Procedure
Handle the fault occurred to the remote station.
----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.74 LP_RDI_VC3

Description
The LP_RDI_VC3 is an alarm indicating that data reception at the remote end of a VC-3 lower
order path fails. This alarm is reported if a board detects that bit 5 of the G1 byte is "1".

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by VC-3 path 1.

Impact on System
The local station is not affected. Data reception at the remote station, however, is interrupted.

Possible Causes
The local station receives a message from the remote station, and the message says that data
reception fails at the remote end of a lower order path.

Handling Procedure
Handle the fault occurred to the remote station.
----End

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-95


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Related Information
None.

A.2.75 LP_REI

Description
The LP_REI is an alarm indicating that there are bit errors over the lower order path of the remote
station. This alarm is reported if the board detects that bit 3 of the V5 (indicating E1 interface
board) byte is 1 or bits 1–4 of the G1 byte (indicating E3/T3 interface board) are 1–8.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by path 1.

Impact on System
The local station is not affected, but there are bit errors in the received signals of the remote
station.

Possible Causes
The local station receives a message from the remote station, and the message says that there
are bit errors in the lower order path of the remote station.

Handling Procedure
Handle the LP_BBE performance event of the remote station.
----End

Related Information
None.

A-96 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

A.2.76 LP_REI_VC12

Description
The LP_REI_VC12 is an alarm indicating that there are bit errors at the remote end of a VC-12
lower order path. This alarm is reported if a board detects that bit 3 of the V5 byte is "1".

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by VC-12 path 1.

Impact on System
The remote station has bit errors in the received data.

Possible Causes
The local station receives a message from the remote station, and the message says that there
are bit errors in the lower order path.

Handling Procedure
Handle the LP_BBE performance event of the remote station.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.77 LP_REI_VC3

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-97


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Description
The LP_REI_VC3 is an alarm indicating that there are bit errors at the remote end of a VC-3
lower order path. This alarm is reported if a board detects that a bit of bits 1–4 of the G1 byte is
"1".

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by VC-3 path 1.

Impact on System
Bit errors exist in the service in the receive direction of the remote station.

Possible Causes
The local station receives a message from the remote station, and the message says that there
are bit errors at the remote end of a lower order path.

Handling Procedure
Handle the VC3BBE performance event.
----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.78 LP_RFI

Description
The LP_RFI is an alarm indicating that the remote end of the lower order path fails. This alarm
is reported if a board detects that bit 4 of the V5 byte is "1".

A-98 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by path 1.

Impact on System
The local station is not affected. The remote station, however, has bit errors in the received data.

Possible Causes
The local station receives a message from the remote station, and the message says that the
remote end of the lower order path fails.

Handling Procedure
Clear the alarm in the lower order path of the remote station.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.79 LP_SIZE_ERR

Description
The LP_SIZE_ERR is an alarm indicating that the TU structure is wrong.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-99


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by path 1.

Impact on System
The services on the board are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l The configuration of the mapping structure is incorrect.
l The tributary board is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the types of the add/drop services configured are consistent with the service types
that the board supports.

If ... Then ...


The service types are inconsistent, Modify the configuration data.
The service types are consistent, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Replace the board that reports the alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.80 LP_SLM

Description
The LP_SLM is an alarm indicating that a mismatched signal label is detected in the lower order
path. This alarm is reported if the board detects a signal label mismatch between the V5 bytes
(indicating E1 interface board) or the C2 bytes (indicating E3/T3 interface board) of both ends.

A-100 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by path 1.

Impact on System
The services in the lower order path are unavailable.

Possible Causes
The signal label contained in the V5 byte or C2 byte that is received by the local station does
not match that transmitted by the remote station.

Handling Procedure
Modify the signal label contained in the V5 byte or C2 byte at the local station or the remote
station and ensure that the signal labels at both ends match each other.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.81 LP_SLM_VC12

Description
The LP_SLM_VC12 is an alarm indicating that a mismatched signal label is detected in a VC-12
lower order path. This alarm is reported if a board detects a mismatched signal label in the V5
byte.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-101


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by the first VC-12 path.

Impact on System
The service in this lower order path is unavailable.

Possible Causes
The signal label in the V5 byte to be received at the local station is different from that transmitted
from the remote station.

Handling Procedure
Modify the signal label in V5 byte to be received at the local station in consistent with that
transmitted from the remote station.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.82 LP_SLM_VC3

Description
The LP_SLM_VC3 is an alarm indicating that a mismatched signal label is detected in a VC-3
path. This alarm is reported if a board detects a mismatched signal label in the C2 byte.

A-102 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by VC-3 path 1.

Impact on System
The service in this lower order path is unavailable.

Possible Causes
The signal label in the C2 byte to be received at the local station is different from that at the
remote station.

Handling Procedure
Modify the signal label to be received at the local station to be the same as that transmitted from
the remote station.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.83 LP_T_FIFO

Description
The LP_T_FIFO is an alarm indicating that the FIFO overflows on the transmission side of the
lower order path.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-103


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Minor Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by path 1.

Impact on System
Bit errors occur to the services.

Possible Causes
l The board is faulty.
l The frequency offset of the input signal is too large.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Test the frequency offset of the input signal.

If ... Then ...


The frequency offset is too large, Troubleshoot the remote station.
The frequency offset meets the requirement, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Replace the board that reports the alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.84 LP_TIM

A-104 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Description
The LP_TIM is an alarm indicating a mismatched lower-order path trace identifier is received.
This alarm is reported if the board detects a mismatch between the J1 bytes (indicating E3/T3
interface board) or the J2 bytes (indicating E1 interface board) of both ends.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by path 1.

Impact on System
None.

Possible Causes
l The J1 or J2 byte to be received by the local station does not match that transmitted by the
remote station..
l Data configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Set the byte mode of the J1/J2 byte to be received by the local station to the disable mode.
Alternatively, you can set the byte mode in consistent with the J1/J2 byte transmitted by the
remote station.
Step 2 Check whether the cross-connections of the intermediate nodes through which the service travels
are correctly configured. If not, correct the cross-connection configuration.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.85 LP_TIM_VC12

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-105


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Description
The LP_TIM_VC12 is an alarm indicating that a mismatched VC-12 lower path trace identifier
is detected. This alarm is reported if a board detects a mismatched J2 byte in a VC-12 path.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by VC-12 path 1.

Impact on System
None.

Possible Causes
l The J1 byte to be received at the local station is different from the J1 byte transmitted from
the remote station.
l Data configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Set the J2 byte to be received at the local station to disabled or to be the same as the J2 byte
transmitted from the remote station.

Step 2 Check whether the cross-connections of the intermediate nodes through which the service travels
are correctly configured. If not, correct the cross-connection configuration.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.86 LP_TIM_VC3

A-106 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Description
The LP_TIM_VC3 is an alarm indicating that a mismatched VC-3 lower path trace identifier is
detected. This alarm is reported if a board detects a mismatched J1 byte in a VC-3 path.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by VC-3 path 1.

Impact on System
None.

Possible Causes
l The J1 byte to be received at the local station is different from the J1 byte transmitted from
the remote station.
l Data configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Set the J1 byte to be received at the local station to disabled or to be the same as the J1 byte
transmitted from the remote station.

Step 2 Check whether the cross-connections of the intermediate nodes through which the service travels
are correctly configured. If not, correct the cross-connection configuration.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.87 LP_UNEQ

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-107


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Description
The LP_UNEQ is an alarm indicating that the lower order path is unequipped. This alarm is
reported if a board detects that the V5 byte signal label is "0".

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by path 1.

Impact on System
The service in this path is unavailable.

Possible Causes
The tributary path of the local station is configured with services, but that of the remote station
is not.

Handling Procedure
Configure tributary services for the remote station.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.88 LP_UNEQ_VC12

Description
The LP_UNEQ_VC12 is an alarm indicating that the VC-12 lower order path is unequipped.
This alarm is reported if a board detects that the signal label in the V5 byte is "0".

A-108 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by VC-12 path 1.

Impact on System
The service in the path is unavailable. If the service is configured with protection, protection
switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
Data configuration has the following errors:
l The tributary path at the local station is configured with services but the corresponding
tributary path at the remote station is not configured with services.
l The cross-connection configurations are incorrect at intermediate NEs.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the corresponding tributary path is configured with services at the remote station.

If ... Then ...


No, Correctly configure the services.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Check whether the cross-connection configurations at intermediate NEs are correct. If not,
correct the configurations.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.89 LP_UNEQ_VC3

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-109


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Description
The LP_UNEQ_VC3 is an alarm indicating that the VC-3 lower order path is unequipped. This
alarm is reported if a board detects that the signal label in the C2 byte is "0".

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by VC-3 path 1.

Impact on System
The service in this path is unavailable. If the service is configured with protection, protection
switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
Data configuration has the following errors:

l The tributary path at the local station is configured with services but the corresponding
tributary path at the remote station is not configured with services.
l The cross-connection configurations are incorrect at intermediate NEs.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the corresponding tributary path is configured with services at the remote station.

If ... Then ...


No, Correctly configure the services.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Check whether the cross-connection configurations at intermediate NEs are correct. If not,
correct the configurations.

----End

A-110 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.2.90 LSR_NO_FITED

Description
The LSR_NO_FITED is an alarm indicating that the laser is not installed.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the optical interface that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by optical interface 1 of the related board.

Impact on System
The optical interface fails to carry services.

Possible Causes
The laser of the local station is not installed.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Based on the alarm parameters, locate the optical interface that reports the alarm.

Step 2 Find out why the laser is not installed, and install it promptly.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.91 LSR_WILL_DIE

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-111


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Description
The LSR_WILL_DIE is an alarm indicating that the service life of the laser will end soon.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical alarm Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the optical interface that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by optical interface 1 of the related board.

Impact on System
The SFP optical module may not function reliably, and thus the services may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
The laser gets aged.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Based on the alarm parameters, locate the optical interface that reports the alarm.

Step 2 Contact the technical support engineers of Huawei to replace the SFP optical module with a new
one.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.92 LTI

Description
The LTI is an alarm indicating that the synchronization source is lost. This alarm is reported if
all the synchronization sources are lost for the NE.

A-112 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 l 0x01: Indicates that all the synchronization sources of the system clock are
lost.
l 0x02: Indicates that all the synchronization sources of the 2-MHz phase-
locked source are lost.

Impact on System
The clock enters the free-run mode and loses synchronization with other NE clocks.

Possible Causes
l The clock configuration is incorrect.
l The clock sources in the clock source priority table fail.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the data in the clock source priority table complies with the network planning
requirement.

If ... Then ...


No, Correct the configurations.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 2 Based on the clock source priority table, locate the synchronization source.

If ... Then ...


The synchronization source is the external Check whether the external clock source
clock, and external clock cable are faulty.
The synchronization source is the line clock, Check whether the line and line board are
faulty.
The synchronization source is the IF clock, Check whether the microwave link, IF
cable, and IF board are faulty.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-113


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

If ... Then ...


The synchronization source is the tributary Check whether the tributary clock source,
clock, relay cable, and tributary board are faulty.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.93 MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH

Description
The MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that a mismatched port module is
detected.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical alarm Maloperation

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01 indicates
that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.

Impact on System
The services carried over the port are interrupted.

Possible Causes
The type defined by the customer for the SFP module is different from the actual module type.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Based on the alarm parameters, locate the port that reports the alarm.

Step 2 Verify the type of the SFP module that connects to the port.

A-114 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

If ... Then ...


The type defined for the SFP module is Contact the technical support engineers of
correct, Huawei to replace the SFP module with an
appropriate one.
The type defined for the SFP module is Go to the next step.
wrong,

Step 3 Specify a correct type for the SFP module.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.94 MS_AIS

Description
The MS_AIS is an alarm indicating multiplex section alarms. This alarm is reported if a board
detects that bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte in three consecutive frames are "111".

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the path ID.

Impact on System
The services on the line port are interrupted. If the services are configured with protection,
protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l The transmit unit of the remote station is faulty.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-115


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

l The receive unit of the local station is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Replace the line board of the remote station.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the board is The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
replaced, is complete.
The alarm persists after the board is Go to the next step.
replaced,

Step 2 Replace the cross-connect and timing board of the remote station.

If ... Then ...


The alarm disappears after the board is The fault is rectified, and the alarm handling
replaced, is complete.
The alarm persists after the board is Go to the next step.
replaced,

Step 3 Replace the board that reports the alarm.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.95 MS_CROSSTR

Description
The MS_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that a performance indicator of the multiplex section
crosses the threshold. This alarm is reported if a board detects that the multiplex section bit error
performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

A-116 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm.
Parameters 4–5 l The two most significant bits of the parameter 4 indicates the performance
monitoring period ("01" means that the monitoring period is 15 minutes,
and "02" means that the monitoring period is 24 hours).
l The parameter 5 and the six least significant bits of the parameter 4 together
indicate the ID of a performance event.

Impact on System
The services contain a large amount of bit errors, and the services may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
The multiplex section bit error performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check the threshold crossing records of multiplex section bit error performance events to
determine the performance event that crosses the preset threshold.
Step 2 Handle the performance event that crosses the threshold.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.96 MS_RDI

Description
The MS_RDI is an alarm indicating that data reception fails at the remote end of the multiplex
section. This alarm is reported if a board detects that bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte are "110".

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-117


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the path ID.

Impact on System
The local station is not affected. Data reception at the remote station, however, is interrupted.

Possible Causes
The local station receives a message from the remote station, and the message says that data
reception fails at the remote end of the multiplex section.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Based on the alarm parameters, locate the line port that reports the alarm.

Step 2 Rectify the fault occurred to the remote station.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.97 MS_REI

Description
The MS_REI is an alarm indicating that there are errors at the remote end of the multiplex section.
This alarm is reported if a board detects that the M1 byte is non-zero.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Warning Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

A-118 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the path ID.

Impact on System
The local station is not affected. The services received by the remote station, however, have bit
errors.

Possible Causes
The local station receives a message from the remote station, and the message says that there
are bit errors at the remote end of the multiplex section.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Based on the alarm parameters, locate the line port that reports the alarm.

Step 2 Handle the MS_BBE performance event on the port.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.98 MSAD_CROSSTR

Description
The MSAD_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that the adaptation performance indicator of the
multiplex section crosses the threshold. This alarm is reported if board detects that an AU pointer
adaptation performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-119


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the line port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01
indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.
Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm.
Parameters 4–5 l The two most significant bits of parameter 4 indicates the performance
monitoring period ("01" means that the monitoring period is 15 minutes,
and "02" means that the monitoring period is 24 hours).
l Parameter 5 and the six least significant bits of parameter 4 together
indicate the ID of a performance event.

Impact on System
Bit errors may occur to the services.

Possible Causes
l An AU pointer adaptation performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check the threshold crossing records of the AU pointer adaptation performance events to
determine the performance event that crosses the preset threshold.
Step 2 Handle the performance event that crosses the threshold.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.99 MSSW_DIFFERENT

Description
The MSSW_DIFFERENT is an alarm indicating that the master and slave software mismatches
each other. This alarm is reported if the NE detects that the master and slave software mismatches
each other.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the

A-120 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,


Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the file location.
l 0x01: Indicates the files in the flash.
l 0x02: Indicates the software that is currently running.

Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the inconsistent file on the SCC board.
Parameters 4–5 Indicate the alarm cause.
l 0x04: Indicates that the file versions in the master and slave areas of an
SCC board are inconsistent.
l 0x08: Indicates that the file versions in the active and standby SCC boards
are inconsistent, or that the files in the corresponding directories of the
active and standby SCC boards have different names.
l 0x0c: Indicates that the file versions in the master and slave areas of an
SCC board are inconsistent and the file versions on the active and standby
SCC boards are also inconsistent.

Impact on System
If the working software is lost, the backup software fails to take over the running services. If no
NE software exists in the flash, the system is unable to restart upon power-off or resetting.

Possible Causes
Software loading is abnormal.

Handling Procedure
Contact the technical support engineers of Huawei for re-loading the software.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.100 MW_FECUNCOR

Description
The MW_FECUNCOR is an alarm indicating that the Reed Solomon (RS) encoding cannot be
corrected.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-121


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Minor Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the IF port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01 indicates that the
alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.

Impact on System
Bit errors occur to the services. If the system is configured with 1+1 FD/SD protection, channel
protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l The microwave link performance degrades.
l The transmit unit of the remote station is faulty.
l The receive unit of the local station is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Refer to 4.3 Troubleshooting Microwave Links.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.101 MW_LIM

Description
The MW_LIM is an alarm indicating that a mismatched microwave link identifier is detected.
This alarm is reported if a board detects a mismatched Link ID in the microwave frame
overheads.

A-122 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the IF port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01 indicates that the
alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.

Impact on System
The microwave link fails to carry services. If the services are configured with SNCP, protection
switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l The Link ID of the local station mismatches the Link ID of the remote station.
l The receive frequency at the local end is incorrectly configured.
l The direction of the antenna is incorrectly configured. As a result, the antenna receives the
microwave from other stations.
l The polarization direction of the XPIC is wrong.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Determine the IF port that reports the alarm according to alarm parameters.
Step 2 Check whether the Link ID of the local station matches the Link ID of the remote station.

If ... Then ...


No, Modify the data configuration.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 3 Check whether the receive/transmit frequencies at the local end are consistent with those at the
remote end.

If ... Then ...


No, Modify the data configurations.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 4 Check whether the XPIC configuration is correct if XPIC protection groups are provided.

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-123


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

If ... Then ...


No, Modify the data configurations.
Yes, Go to the next step.

Step 5 Adjust the direction of the antenna to align it properly with the antenna at the remote end.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.102 MW_LOF

Description
The MW_LOF is an alarm indicating that the Reed Solomon (RS) frame is lost.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the IF port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01 indicates that the
alarm is reported by port 1 of the related board.

Impact on System
The services are interrupted. If the system is configured with protection, protection switching
may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l The microwave link performance degrades.
l The transmit unit of the remote station is faulty.
l The receive unit of the local station is faulty.
l The working modes of the IF units at the local and the remote stations are the same.
l The working modes of the ODUs at the local and the remote stations are the same.

A-124 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Handling Procedure
Refer to 4.3 Troubleshooting Microwave Links.
----End

Related Information
None.

A.2.103 MW_RDI

Description
The MW_RDI is an alarm indicating that there are defects at the remote end of the microwave
link. This alarm is reported if an IF board detects an RDI in the microwave frame overheads.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the IF port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01 indicates that the
alarm is reported by port 1 of the board.

Impact on System
If the local station is configured with reverse switching and both the active and standby boards
receive the MW_RDI alarm at the same time, the 1+1 switching may be triggered. This alarm
also indicates that service reception at the remote station may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
After detecting a service alarm that is caused by a microwave link fault, the receive station returns
a microwave link fault indication to the transmit station.

Handling Procedure
Handle the microwave alarm occurred to the remote station.
----End

Issue 03 (2008-8-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-125


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
A Alarm Reference IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide

Related Information
None.

A.2.104 NESF_LOST

Description
The NESF_LOST is an alarm indicating that the NE software is lost. This alarm is reported if
the SCC board detects that the NE software in the flash memory is lost.

Attribute

Alarm Severity Alarm Type


Critical Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following
table.

Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the inspection object.
l 0x01: Indicates an ordinary file.
l 0x02: Indicates the version file of the running software.
l 0x03: Indicates a special inspection object.

Parameters 2–3 Indicate the ID of the inspection object.

l 0x01, 0x03, and 0x05 indicate the scc.fpga, nesoft.hwx, and ne.ini in the
ofs1, respectively.
l 0x02, 0x04, and 0x06 indicate the scc.fpga, nesoft.hwx, and ne.ini in the
ofs2, respectively.
Parameter 4 Indicates the alarm cause.
l If the first bit is "1", you can infer that the file does not exist.
l If the second bit is "1", you can infer that verification of the file fails.
l If the third bit is "1", you can infer that the version of the file in the active
area is different from that of the file in the standby area.
l If the fourth bit is "1", you can infer that the version of the file in the active
board is different from that of the file in the standby board.

A-126 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2008-8-30)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference

Impact on System
If the NE software does not exist in the master and slave storage areas, an NE cannot be restarted
after it is powered off or reset.

Possible Causes
l No NE software is loaded after the existing ones are erased.
l Loading the NE software is unsuccessful.
l The portable flash memory is not in position or is faulty.

Handling Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the alarm is caused by the loading operation.

If ... Then ...


Yes, Contact the technical support engineers of Huawei to re-load the NE software.
No, Go to the nex